Home

1756-UM001D-EN-P, ControlLogix System User Manual

1. Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS AverageVelocityTimebase GSV 40 6 29 3 AXIS AverageVelocityTimebase SSV 130 7 108 0 AXIS AxisConfigurationState GSV 28 8 20 7 AXIS AxisControlBits GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS AxisEventBits GSV 40 1 29 1 AXIS AxisFaultBits GSV 40 0 29 1 AXIS AxisInfoSelect1 GSV 38 5 27 6 AXIS AxisInfoSelect1 SSV 130 4 107 6 AXIS AxisInfoSelect2 GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS AxisInfoSelect2 SSV 130 4 107 6 AXIS AxisInstance GSV 34 4 24 9 AXIS AxisResponseBits GSV 108 8 84 1 AXIS AxisState GSV 24 2 18 0 AXIS AxisStatusBits GSV 40 1 29 1 AXIS AxisType GSV 36 3 26 1 AXIS AxisType SSV 123 7 103 8 AXIS BrakeEngageDelayTime SSV 128 7 106 0 AXIS BrakeOffDelayTime GSV 35 6 25 8 AXIS BrakeOnDelayTime GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS BrakeReleaseDelayTime SSV 128 7 106 0 AXIS BusRegulatorCapacity GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS BusRegulatorlD GSV 36 8 25 9 AXIS C2CConnectionInstance GSV 40 3 29 2 AXIS C2CMaplnstance GSV 40 4 29 2 AXIS CommandAcceleration GSV 59 9 40 9 AXIS CommandPosition GSV 60 2 40 9 AXIS CommandVelocity GSV 597 40 7 AXIS ConversionConstant GSV 40 9 29 4 AXIS ConversionConstant SSV 126 4 105 7 AXIS DampingFactor GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS DampingFactor SSV 130 5 107 5 AXIS DCBusVoltage GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS DriveAxisID GSV 36 2 25 8 AXIS DriveCapacity GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS DriveFaultAction GSV 28 2 19 7 Publication
2. 4 13 Chapter 5 When to Use This 5 1 Before You Bes qae tib Y eras ND Eur D sed 5 1 Select a Communication Method 5 2 Produce d TAS cox nee COE eS sea NOCET 5 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 4 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 6 Add the Other 5 9 COBSURIC 4 e snp ope Ba arp y er ees 5 11 Validate Connections de QU e ed o sitio f P Ra 5 12 Does Another Controller Require the Data 5 13 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 5 14 Enter a Message 5 16 Configure the Message 5 18 Stagger the Messqaesen Vox a 5 22 Access ControlLogix Data 5 23 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Table of Contents iii Chapter 6 When to Use This 6 1 Before You 6 1 How to Use This 6 2 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 6 3 Add the PanelView 1 6 5 Vout roye ran
3. 5555555555555955 0655605000009000 0090300000000000 TEST TES TEST TEST Switch 42872 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 2 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Before You Use This Before you use this procedure do the following Procedure 1 To communicate with I O modules over an EtherNet IP network you must use a 1756 ENBx or ENET B module in the local chassis If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the following modules e ENB module in the local chassis e AEN module Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 How to Use This Procedure you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step Add the local 1756 ENBx or ENET module To complete this procedure do the following steps Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module e Add I O Modules e Address I O To check your work do the following step e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November
4. terminals for external 24V dc power supply A Install an AIC 1 Connect the AIC to a 24 VDC power supply 2 On the DC SOURCE switch select External 3 Connect the RS 485 port to the DH 485 network B Connect the serial port of the ControlLogix controller to either port 1 or port 2 of the AIC If you connect to this port Over this distance Use this cable port 1 lt 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL ACOO DB 9 RS 232 DTE connection gt 45 cm 17 7 in 1756 CP3 port 2 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 mini DIN 8 95 232 connection gt 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBLPMO2 For additional information see AIC Advanced Interface Converter User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 19 4 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 2 Configure the Serial Port 5 8 Controller name of controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler a Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs ae A Right click Controller name_of_controller and select Properties B Click the Serial Port tab Major Faults Minor Faults Date and Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol C Mode Show afne Values D B Baud Rate 19200 42587 C Select System default D Select 792
5. m B E B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D Name Slot 0 E Description a Revision in Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F 42377 D Type a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 3 H Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the contro
6. 42251 Select System default Select the settings for your DF1 network Select Half Duplex Clear Cuncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on Chigh and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off low Y Y SALE Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 5 K Click Apply L Click the System Protocol tab General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Error Detection 4 Protocol DF1 Master I e BCC CRC a N Aan Enable Duplicate Detection 0 Transmit Retries ACK Timeout o x20 ms Reply Message Wait x20 ms Poling Mode Standard multiple message transfer per node scan Master Transmit Between station polls Normal Poll Node Taq mj Normal Poll Group Size p Priority Poll Node T ag mj Active Station T ag xj 42388 M Select DF1 Master N Select the error detection method that your equipment uses O Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box P Type an address between 0 and 254 for thi
7. Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx AVE SINT 544 x 6 6 4710 x 5 8 x Length AVE INT 545 x 7 0 470 x 6 1 AVE DINT 53 9 x 6 5 468 5 7 AVE REAL 440 x 147 38 7 x 13 6 AWA n a 79 5 61 7 AWT n a 79 6 61 8 BSL DINT 79 x 32 0 8 64 x 32 06 x Length BSR DINT 87 32 08 7 0 x 32 0 6 Round up x 32 to a whole number BTD DINT 127 10 5 CLR DINT 0 35 0 34 CLR REAL 0 40 0 39 CMP 4 31 3 6 CONCAT n a 107 x 1 4 9 1 x 1 1 x number of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B COP SINT 6 9 x 0 1 6 5 x 0 1 x Length COP INT 67 x 0 2 62 02 COP DINT 71 x 0 3 66 x 0 3 COP REAL 71 x 0 3 6 6 x 0 3 COS REAL 222 9 208 3 CPS SINT 154 0 1 138 x 0 1 x Length CPS INT 15 2 x 0 2 134 x 0 2 CPS DINT 157 x 0 3 139 x 0 3 CPS REAL 157 x 0 3 139 x 0 3 CPT n a 48 4 0 CTD COUNTER 0 43 0 42 CTU COUNTER 0 43 0 42 DDT 0 mismatches DINT 131 x 1 4 10 8 x 1 0 x number of bits to compare DDT 1 mismatches DINT 279 x 14 216 10 DDT 2 mismatches DINT 416 x 1 4 316 x 1 0 DEG REAL 18 8 18 2 DELETE n a 10 6 1 6 8 9 x 1 2 x number of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B DIV DINT 11 0 10 5 DIV REAL 18 8 18 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P N
8. BTR cfg 0 Rack rack number of the module octal BTR cfg 0 Group group number of the module depends on chassis addressing BTR cfg 0 Slot slot number of the module depends on chassis addressing BTR_cfg 0 Path path to the 1756 DHRIO module A Right click and select Go to Message Path Editor B Select the 1756 DHRIO module C Choose OK Properties for the next t t BTR cfg 1 BT module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 22 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Convert the INTs to DINTs 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module DN is on this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads e The FAL instruction then loads the values from int buffer read into BT input This converts the values to DINTs for use in the project e index determines where in the first dimension of B7_input to store the values Each element of this dimension corresponds to a specific BT module BTR DN BTR inis to dints MOV 2 Move Source BTR REG_LEN oe Dest to dints LEN oe File Arith Logical Control BTF_ints_to_dints Length De Position De Mode all Dest BT input BTR index ints to dints PQ5 D Expression BTR_i
9. Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 5 Add the PanelView i E 1 0 Configuration Terminal 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select PanelView and click OK Name 1 H D Description a E Comm Format Data 32 INT
10. MSG 4 4 6 Unconfigured __ END Message Control message 42424 Where Is an dint_array array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 14 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 7 Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click Table 22 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data Message Type PLC5 Typed Head Source Element Qname where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other c
11. ER gt e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 13 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix Write integers to a PLC 5 controller controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int b
12. Write integers to a PLC 5 controller controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the other controller Where dint array condition fal control FAL 4 CRES 4 File Arith Logical Control fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN MSG iE 4 Type Unconfigured __ Message Control message gt Is an 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 16 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click B Select a configuration for the message Table 17 A Message to a ControlLogix controlle
13. 1756 CNB Backplane 1756 Ax T xx 1756 Lx F Select the ControlLogix controller G Choose Apply and confirm the update H Click the Data Collection tab Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 5 DataSource Data Collection Advanced Communication Processor Type 1 ogix5000 Data Collection Mode Polled Messages mSec i000 I Type the update Unsolicited Messages rate ms for the J Gache Unsolicited Data data J Send all Gnsolieitedinpdates Communications Time Out Secs 20 J Click the Use Symbols 8 Symbols check box Limit Maximum Packets 20 42428 Select Tag Name Database 24 xX Look in a Projects c Samples Your_RSLogix5000_Project Files of type Cancel 43083 Select RSLogix 5000 L Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic M Choose Open N Choose Done and then Yes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 6 Communicate with RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create a Polled Node A Open the RSView project ime YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your RSView Project Edit Mode a Your RSView Project J E System Project Settings Channel Channel Je Node
14. 29 ESAN S ESN 1756 CP3 cable 20884 Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation Start RSLinx software From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers From the Available Driver Types list select RS 232 DF1 Devices Click Add New Click OK to accept the default name for the driver From the Comm Port drop down list select the serial port on the workstation that the cable is connected to From the Device drop down list select Logix 5550 Serial Port Click Auto Configure Does the dialog box display the following message Auto Configuration Successful If Then Yes Click OK No Go to step 6 and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 21 4 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Step 3 Select a Path A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller B From the Communications menu select Who Active Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet To expand a network one level click the sign TCP 1 Ethernet AB DFI DFI C Expand the DF1 driver to the level of the controller Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 1 TCP 1 Eth
15. ms gt Remote 2 0 Tag Name Y gt Data Type eontaure Select the Consumed option button Select the controller that contains the produced tag Type the name of the produced tag Select the same data type as the produced tag Type or select the time between updates of the tag Use the highest value permissible for your application Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 12 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 2 Gesrablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Wie
16. ControlLogix M controller 1761 NET AIC connection from ControlLogix controller to port 1 or port 2 E 1747 AIC 1761 NET AIC DH 485 network B E 1761 NET AIC ES 5 74 ir MicroLogix SLC 5 03 controller EE 9 controller 3 CompactLogix controller i 42589 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 19 2 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure do the following steps Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 e Step 1 e Step 2 e Step 3 e Step 4 e Step 5 e Step 6 Connect the Controller to an AIC Configure the Serial Port Enter a Message Configure the Message Check the LED Stagger the Messages Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 3 Step 1 Connect the In this step you install a 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface oem AIC which connects the ControlLogix controller to the DH 485 Controller to an AIC PUR 1761 NET AIC Advanced Interface Converter AIC RS 485 port port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE gt lt q dc power source selector switch H EXTERNAL
17. Datafroma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Wodi gt BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT input 0 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 BT input 0 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 BT input 0 2 BT input 0 3 3 4 BT_input 0 4 Word 1 int buffer BT input 1 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 BT input 1 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 BT input 12 Word 4 int buffer read 3 BT input 1 3 Word 5 int buffer read 4 BT input 1 4 Input data that is allocated for the first BT module Input data that is allocated for the next BT module The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the first BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The MSG instruction reads the next module This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 13 To read multiple block transfer modules Create a User Defined Data Type Create the Array for the Input Data Send a Bl
18. Disable Renew 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Disable Status The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module Disable BOOTP Command Successful 42892 Save the Relation List The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re configure the module in the future 1 From the File menu choose Save Relation List 2 Type or select a file name 3 Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 24 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Test the Configuration 1 If you have not already done so a Connect the module to the network b Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module 2 From the Windows NT Start menu select Programs gt Command Prompt 3 Type ping IP_address and press the Enter key where IP_address is the IP address of the module 4 Did you receive a reply from the module If Then Yes You have a valid configuration for the module No Check your configuration 5 Close the Command Prompt window Connect Directly toa To set up communications between your computer and a controller Controller Connect a Serial Cable Configure a Serial Driver Connect a Serial Cable 40043 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 25
19. E Move Source BTW _cfo BTW_index REQ_LEN 0 MOV Dest BTw dints to ints LEN ne File Arith Logical Control BTW dints to ints Lenath De Position De Mode ALL Dest BTW int buffer write BTW dints to ints POS 0 Expression BT_output BTW_index BTW_dints_to_ints POS 43035 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 25 BTW dints to ints DN MOV 7 Move Source BTW cfa BTw index REG LEN 0 Dest BTw REG LEN ge MOV MOV Move Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Channel Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Rack 00 8 000 Dest BTW Channel Dest BTW Rack B e S 000 MOY MOY Move Move Source BTW_cfo BTW_index Group Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Slot 0 0 Dest BTW Group Dest BTW Slot co MSG Copy File Type Block Transfer Write Source BTW_cfg BTW_index Path Message Control BTW Dest BTW Path FO Length 1 E 43036 i BTw DN ADD 8 Add Source 1 Source B BTW index De Dest BTW index 0e 43037 I Qu LR 3 Equal Clear Source BTW index Dest BTW index 0e pe Source BT output modules 0e 43037 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 26 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Address 1 0 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic For step by step instructions on how to enter logic and tag n
20. Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails while in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box I If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a modules fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating J Click Finish Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 10 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 4 Add the Other Controller a 6 1 0 Configuration g 5 1756 CNB B name of local cnb 8 amp Add a PLC 5C controller 49 1 1788 CNC A name of 48 amp Add a FlexLogix controller 8 2 5 1756 CNB B name of remote cnb amp Adda ControlLogix controller 42428 A What type of controller receives the message If it is a Then PLC 5C right click the local 1756 CNB module
21. rnzr Ethernet network IP address 127 127 127 12 Message rnzrm washer 2 127 127 127 12 1 0 where indicates washer name of the ENB or ENET module 2 Ethernet port of the ENB or ENET module 127 127 127 12 IP address of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis 1 backplane port of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis 0 slot number of the destination controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 22 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network If the message is to a PLC 5 controller K Complete the communication parameters Then 1 Leave the C P button selected SLC 500 controller 2 Disregard the Cache Connection check box Logix5000 controller e ControlLogix controller e FlexLogix controller Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to If Then 16 or less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the Logix5000 controllers most frequent messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box L Click OK As you add messages to your pro
22. Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 Type the rate that you want time critical data to transfer with the PanelView terminal 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box 11 If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 8 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Organize Your Data For data that is time critical e g controls a machine Organize your data for the PanelView based on how the data is used Do this Use the 1 0 tags of the PanelView The tags for this data were created when you added the PanelView to the 1 0 configuration of the controller They are similar to the tags of I O modules See Table 6 A not time critical Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Create arrays to store the data 1 For each PanelView screen create a BOOL array with enough elements for the bit level objects on the screen For example the BOOL 32 array gives
23. Schedule the ControlNet Network To check your work do the following task e Validate Connections Add the Local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module m Ex Controller name of controller Controller T ags Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks MainT ask 5 29 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs LI Trends 1 4 Data Types User Defined Predefined Cy Module Defined 9 140 Configuration o 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 3 Name 50 Slot EE E Description H zl Revision m i Electronic Keying Compatible Module F 42371 D a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 4 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network H Inhibit Module
24. 42376 B Right click Controller name_of_controller and select Properties C Click the Serial Port tab o Controller Properties Ascii examples Oy x Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol D Mode Baud Rate 19200 gt Data Bits je Parity None Stop Bits ho H F Control Line Handshake f G Continuous Lamer H BTS Send Delay D x20 ms RTS Off Delay fo x20 ms 42251 D Select System default E Select the settings for your DF1 network F Select Half Duplex G Clear Cuncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default H Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay I Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off low Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure Master and Slave Communications 22 11 J Click Apply K Click the System Protocol tab 42388 L Select DF1 Slave M Select the error detection method that your equipment uses N Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box O Type an address between 0
25. Remote Station Address node number of the controller that receives the message Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the DH network of the controller that receives the message SLC 500 controller Communication Command PLCS Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Data Table Address Target Device starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message Local Bridge Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message Remote Bridge Addr 0 Remote Station Address node number of the controller that receives the message Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the network of the controller that receives the message Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 18 8 Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 19 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from controllers over a DH 485 network FlexLogix controller oy ty E connection from FlexLogix controller to port 1 or port 2
26. 8 1 Add the Local 1756 CNB 8 2 Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module 8 4 O MOdules ck a ft ane oh te ade a s 8 6 5 sha vera Tee dede PUER PRA PS es RS 8 10 Schedule the ControlNet Network 8 13 Validate Connections ao data ake eo o eo SEE 8 14 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table of Contents iv Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 9 When to Use This 9 1 How to Use This Procedure iu exi XC 9 1 Add the Local 1756 CNB 9 3 Add the 1771 ACN Module 9 5 Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module 9 7 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 9 8 Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer a oou dq ot x ee re a e eur Cd oet e E qoid 9 10 Configure the 9 11 Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules 9 12 Create a User Defined Data 9 13 Create the Array for the Input Data 9 14 Send a Block Transfer Read Message 9 15 Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module
27. F Choose OK Station Mapping Station Add New Delete G In the Host Name column type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet IP device with which you want to communicate 42585 Examples aurora 130 151 136 164 H Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet IP device on this network Yes 1 Choose Add New 2 Go to Step G No Go to the next step I Choose OK J Choose Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network 2 3 Select a Path A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller B From the Communications menu select Who Active To expand a network one level do one Workstation of the following Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet e Select the network and press AB_DF1 x DF1 the key e Click the sign gt AB_ETH x Ethernet C Expand the Ethernet driver to the level of the controller Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 AB_ETH x Ethernet XXX XXX XXX XXX 1756 ENBx Backplane 1756 Ax gt xx 1756 Lx D Select the controller and choose a button You may have to confirm the action To Choose monitor the project in the controller Go Online transfer a copy of the project from
28. 2 To test a section of the system clear the check boxes for the modules of that section i e uninhibit the modules H If communication fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a modules fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating I Click Finisb Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 12 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 5 Entera Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s condition MSG J F j E Message Message Control E DN5 e A CERO e e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name of controller controller and click OK e condition X MSG e lE JE Type Unconfigured Message Control message
29. D Choose OK Communication Path Path to the 1771 ACN module A Click Browse B Select the 1771 ACN module with which you want to communicate C Choose OK Although your logic will control the path the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial path Slot slot number of the BT module Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value Cache Connection check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Clear the Cache Connection check box Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 17 Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module Tag Name BTR_cfg 3 63 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 48 J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 88 MainProgram 2j Program T ags E MainRoutine m 42376 Double click Controller Tags Enter the BTR properties for each BT module Value Properties for the firt M BT module BTR_cfg 0 BTR cfg 0 REQ LEN number of elements to transfer Properties for the next M BT module BTR cfg 0 Slot slot number of the module independent of chassis addressing BTR cfg 0 Path path to the 1771 ACN module A Right click and select Go to Message Path Editor B Select the 1771 ACN module C Ch
30. No Select the ENB or ENET module and choose OK In the Path text box type a comma Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 20 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 G Type the port number from which the message exits For this port Specify backplane port from a 1756 controller or module 1 DF1 port from a 1756 L1 controller 2 ControlNet port from a 1756 CNB module EtherNet IP port from a ENB or ENET module DH port over channel A from a 1756 DHRIO module DH port over channel B from a 1756 DHRIO module 3 Type Type the address of the next hardware device e g controller module For a device ona Specify ControlLogix backplane slot number DF1 network station address 0 254 ControlNet network node number 1 99 decimal DH network 8 followed by the node number 1 77 octal For example to specify an octal node address of 37 type 8 37 EtherNet IP network IP address four decimal numbers separated by periods or host name Communicate with Another Controller over EtherNet IP Network 5 21 J Repeat steps F through I until you have specified the destination controller The following examples depicts a communication path Communication path from a Logix5000 controller to a Logix5000 controller over an EtherNet IP network
31. ag 42316 Qv E m Is the local ENB module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to the next step no Right click O Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 5 D 85 Name punl Address Host Name Description m C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt E Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 1
32. 42580 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying H Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 I Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 8 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network J Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms K Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode un J In step D which Comm Format did you select If Then Hack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the chec
33. Message Type PLC5 Typed Head Source Element Qname where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Table 23 Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Configure Dial Up Communications 23 9 Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Elem
34. Revision 2 f 3j Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42400 name for the PanelView terminal D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the terminal E Does the terminal read more than 8 words of scheduled data 16 bit integers or write more than 8 words of scheduled data If Then select up to 8 Data 8 INT more than 8 Data 32 INT EXAMPLE Select a Comm Format If the PanelView terminal writes e 45 time critical bits 45 16 3 integers 4 time critical integers Then the terminal writes 7 time critical integers so select Data 8 INT F How closely must the PanelView terminal match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 6 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network G Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms L Inhibit Module J MajorFault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 H Type the rate that you want scheduled data to transfer with the PanelView terminal Use a power of two time the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5ms type a rate of 10 20ms etc I Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes L
35. When to Use This Use this procedure to send a message over a DH network between Procedure ControlLogix controllers ControlLogix controller and a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller ControlLogix Controller PLC 5 Controller DH Network ControlLogix Controller SLC 500 Controller 42470 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 2 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network How to Use This Procedure have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary steps Configure Routing Tables Configure a 1756 DHRIO Channel To complete this procedure do the following steps Add a 1756 DHRIO Module Enter a Message Configure the Message e Stagger the Messages If a PLC 5 or an SLC 5 05 controller sends the message do the following step Access ControlLogix Data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure Routing Tables If a PLC 5 controller SLC 500 controller Sends a message to a Overa ControlLogix controller local network Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 3 Determine if you must complete this task And there is only one ControlLogix controller in the chassis Then Go to Configure a 1756 DHRIO Channel on page 17 8 more than one ControlLogix controller in the chassis Complete this tas
36. 1 Obtain a 1756 CP3 serial cable You can also use a 1747 CP3 cable from the SLC product family but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door If you make your own serial cable Limit the length to 15 2m 50 fv gt e Wire the connectors as follows Workstation Controller 1 CD 1 CD 2 RDX 2 RDX 3 TXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 4 DTR COMMON COMMON 6 DSR 6 DSR EN 7 RTS 7 RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 9 42231 e Attach the shield to both connectors zN E 1756 CP3 cable 20884 2 Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 26 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure a Serial Driver 10 Start RSLinx software From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers From the Available Driver Types list select RS 232 DF1 Devices Click Add New Click OK to accept the default name for the driver From the Comm Port drop down list select the serial port on the workstation that the cable is connected to From the Device drop down list select Logix 5550 Serial Port Click Auto Configure Does the dialog box display the following message Auto Configuration Successful If Th
37. 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 1680001 16 00ff 1880100 16 01ff 1880200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 16 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the 4 following types of RSView projects rocedure e RSView32 project RSView Machine Edition project developed with RSView Studio software RSView32 or RSView Machine Edition project je e e ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 42473 switch How to Use This Procedure IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure configure the 1756 ENBx or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 To communicate with an RSView project you have two opti
38. 9 17 Convert the INTs to 9 18 Step to the Next BT 9 19 Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules 9 20 Address T O epee ara ae PO edP HR ROC CR UA 9 22 Schedule the ControlNet Network 9 24 Validate 9 25 Stagger 9 27 Chapter 10 When to Use This 10 1 How to Use This 10 1 Add the local 1756 CNB 10 2 Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module 10 4 Add TO Modules cea fat eer SP ated d Eos Sed 10 6 Create 10 10 Schedule the ControlNet Network 10 13 Validate 10 14 Chapter 11 When to Use This 11 1 How to Use This 11 2 Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB 11 3 Step 2 Add the Remote 1756 CNB 11 5 Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC 11 8 Step 4 Add the Other 11 10 Step 5 Enter Messages a ew rp e were V GR E re 11 12 Step 6 Configure the 11 14 Step 7 Stagger the
39. B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data Message Type PLC5 Typed Head Source Element Qname where name isthe first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Table 19 B Message to an SLC 500 or MicroLogix controller
40. Connect Directly to a gt Controller on page 1 24 3 Turn on the power to the module TIP Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Connect to the Module 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline 5 9 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 9 Controller Fault Handler CI Power Up Handler H E Tasks 3 48 MainT ask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs C Trends 3 6 Data Types Cy User Defined Predefined Cy Module Defined CI 140 Configuration lt q 42316 2 Right click VO Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 Name pum 5 Address Host Name Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 9 Description z C Address 4 1 Host Name lt Unspecified gt 5 Slot 2 Revision au 1 c Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 6 4 name for module 5 or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information
41. ControlNet network 11 1 DH 17 1 18 1 DH 485 19 1 dial up 23 1 Ethernet network 5 1 map address A 1 master and slave controllers 22 1 MicroLogix controller DH 485 network 19 1 modem 22 1 23 1 Monitor Connections 15 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 motion control program 24 1 PanelView Terminal ControlNet network 13 1 EtherNet IP network 6 1 PLC 5 controllers ControlNet network 11 1 12 1 DF1 22 1 DH 17 1 18 1 Ethernet network 5 1 map address A 1 program over a serial cable 21 1 over an Ethernet network 2 1 Program a Controller over an Ethernet Network 2 1 Program Motion Control 24 1 remote 1 0 1756 3 1 8 1 1771 9 1 20 1 1794 4 1 10 1 20 1 route messages ControlNet networks 12 1 DH network 18 1 routing table 17 1 18 1 RS232 LED 19 10 RSView32 project ControlNet network 14 1 Ethernet network 7 1 S serial cable 19 3 21 1 22 1 serial communications dial up 23 1 master and slave controllers 22 1 workstation 21 1 sign extension C 1 SLC 500 controller DF1 22 1 DH 17 1 18 1 DH 485 network 19 1 Ethernet network 5 1 map address A 1 Index 3 T Z time execution B 1 zero fill C 2 U Universal Remote 1 0 network 20 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 Index Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 How Are We Doing Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better the future Thank you for taking the time to prov
42. DINT p zi pea Address Host Name 5 Address Status put Host Name lt Unspecitied gt status 3 Type a name for this PanelView instance 42820 4 Select Data DINT 5 Select the IP Address button and type the IP address of the PanelView terminal Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 6 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Name Description 7 Comm Format Data DINT Address Host Name Address Host Name lt Unspecitied gt 6 7 Connection Parameters Assembly f Instance Size Input 125 4 20 Ow 2 oes Configuatio o 4 ew Status Output 6 Type the assembly instance numbers for this PanelView instance Forthis instance Type this Input Assembly Type this Output Assembly Type this Configuration 42820 number Instance Instance Assembly Instance 1 7 6 2 9 8 3 11 10 4 3 12 5 5 14 6 7 16 7 9 18 8 21 20 7 Type the following sizes for the input output and configuration data For this size Type Input 100 Output 100 Configuration 8 Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 7 9 Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms 10 3 T Inhibit Module Ti
43. If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 9 Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 C Click the Communication tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 station_address where station address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the
44. Import Export Type import Hoview Studio CSV files Import a Import RSView Studio CSV files Database Import Export Wizard Choose the RSView Studio CSV files you want to import Import Files Iv Tags ec EH HR Database Import Export Wizard Choose the import options you want Import Options Tags Skip Existing Fastest your option Update Existing Slower Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 11 4 Database Import Export Wizard RSView project 4 Database Import Export Wizard All correct Correct 43072 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 12 Create a Polled Tag Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network To create RSView tags one tag at a time im YOUR RSVIEw PROJECT RSV Project Explorer Your RSView Project amp Your RSView Project C3 System Project Settings Channel gt Node 1 Scan Class Tag Database Edit Mode WM Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts ms 43081 User Accounts 08 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Tag Name Type Analog Security 7 Description C ption Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Minimum 0 Scale
45. Length DN2 Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN MSG J E Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message CDN gt 42387 Where Is an dint_array array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 8 Configure Dial Up Communications Step 5 Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click Table 23 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type B Select a configuration for the message Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller not structure s read receive the data
46. November 2001 H Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 I Click Next Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 7 J Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms K Inhibit Module Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 J In step D which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finis
47. Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 5 Step 2 Add the Remote Determine if you must complete this step 1756 CNB Module If the other controller is a Then ControlLogix controller Complete this step FlexLogix controller Go to Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Module PLC 5C controller Go to Step 4 Add the Other Controller E 10 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name of local cnb and select New Module B Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK Name Node 4 41 D n Chassis Size 10 4 2 Description Slot 0 Comm Format Rack Optimization zi Revision 23 E Electronic Keying Compatible Module gt 4 H 42404 C Type a name for the CNB module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis F Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Hack Optimization No None G Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 6 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network H How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this i
48. RN 40 92 UID 36 UIE 36 UPPER 88 XIC 4 XIO 4 XOR 28 XPY 144 52 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 8 Estimate Memory Use Function Block Instructions The following table shows the memory use of the function block instructions Table C 4 Memory Size of Function Block Instructions Instruction Memory bytes blank sheet 84 ALM 204 BAND 188 BNOT 176 BOR 188 BXOR 180 CTUD 204 D2SD 300 D3SD 344 DEDT 296 DERV 184 DFF 188 ESEL 248 FGEN 204 HLL 96 HPF 72 INTG 72 JKFF 88 LDL2 72 LDLG 72 LPF 72 MAVE 216 MAXC 88 MINC 188 MSTD 216 MUX 208 NTCH 72 OSFI 184 OSRI 184 PI 68 PIDE 348 PMUL 88 POSP 208 RESD 184 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Memory Use C 9 Table C 4 Memory Size of Function Block Instructions Continued Instruction Memory bytes RLIM 184 RMPS 324 RTOR 196 SCL 168 SCRV 172 SEL 92 SETD 184 SNEG 188 SOC 168 SRTP 168 SSUM 204 TOFR 196 TONR 200 TOT 264 UPDN 176 Array Indexes Memory use for an instruction increases for each parameter that references an array Keep in mind these considerations 1 When an array uses immediate values for the index there is no additional memory added Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 24 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT MOV instruc
49. Select an adapter module and click OK If the 1 0 is Then select 1747 1747 ASB 1771 1771 ASB 1791 RIO ADAPTER 1794 1794 ASB Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 7 Name Description a zl Parent module 1 Rack octal 0 4 Parent Channel Channel Starting Group 0 4 6 Size 1 4 Rack 21 0 Groups a 7 42441 3 Type a name for the adapter module Use a name that identifies the I O of this adapter 4 Type or select rack number of this module 5 Select the channel on 1756 DHRIO module that is network is connected to 6 Type or select the starting group number 7 For the rack number of this adapter select the number of groups in this chassis Round up to the nearest even number of groups 8 Click Next 9 Requested Packet Interval RPI ms 10 Inhibit Module 11 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 Type the rate at which the I O of this adapter must update 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 8 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 11 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication wi
50. System Time Master for tl 43085 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 4 Program Motion Control Add the Motion Module 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types 1 0 Configuration 48 amp 1 Right click and select New Module 2 Select the your type of motion module and choose OK 3 Name Slot 0 E 4 a zl Revision fi 4 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 5 Description 42371 3 Type a name for the module 4 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 5 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 6 Choose Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 Inhibit Module Program Motion Control 24 5 8 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 7 Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you a
51. Table B 5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions Continued B 25 Instruction Time us Notes 1756 11 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx D2SD 78 60 D3SD 96 73 DEDT 113 80 DEG 20 19 DERV 104 68 DFF 12 10 DIV 20 19 EQU 2 2 ESEL Average Sel 85 62 ESEL High Select 71 53 ESEL Low Select 80 60 ESEL Manual 34 29 ESEL Median Sel 138 103 FGEN 142 97 FRD 10 8 GEO 2 2 GRT 2 2 HLL 24 19 HPF 302 196 INTG 104 72 JKFF 14 11 LDL2 283 193 LDLG 222 141 LEQ 2 2 LES 2 2 LIM 5 4 LN 194 182 LOG 194 183 LPF 298 193 MAVE uniform 61 x 16 3 49 x 9 7 x number of samples MAVE weighted 46 x 11 5 38 x 7 1 x number of samples MAXC 23 22 MEO 2 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 26 Estimate Execution Time Table B 5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions Continued Instruction Time us Notes 1756 11 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx MINC 24 23 MOD 65 58 MSTD 136 x 49 0 91 288 x number of samples MUL 19 18 MUX 24 21 MVMT 13 11 NEG 2 2 NEO 2 2 NOT 1 NTCH 357 236 OR 1 OSFI 13 9 12 9 190 133 589 410 PMUL 135 86 POSP 136 88 RAD 19 18 RESD 10 1 RLIM 96 72 RMPS 163 111 RTOR 57 37 SCL
52. The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to BT module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 11 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung Reads 16 bit integers INTs from the module and stores them in int buffer read Only include the msg write EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module msg read EN msg write EN MSG 4 6 J H Type Block Transfer Read Message Control msg read E lt DN gt CERO 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg read block transfer read message MESSAGE name of controller controller msg write block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE name of controller controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 12 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 2 Enter the following rung When msg_read is done the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the controller msg_read DN ints_to_dints FAL JE CRES File Arith Logical Control ints_to_dints Length t CDN gt Position 0 Mode ALL Dest dints_input ints_to_dints POS Expression int buffer read ints to dints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scop
53. in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 C Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the structure for the communication module e g ENB CNB start conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 1E LII FT HA 42435 pile FT1 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 13 Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network If No CO CO ON Then B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click
54. monitor 15 1 troubleshoot 3 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 13 1 ControlNet network communicate with a PanelView terminal 13 1 communicate with an RSView32 project 14 1 determine when data is updated D 1 send a message over a 11 1 D DeviceNet network 16 1 DF1 dial up 23 1 master and slave communications 22 1 workstation 21 1 DH network 17 1 18 1 DH 485 19 1 dial up communications 23 1 domain name assign 1 1 E Establish Serial Communications with the Controller 21 1 Estimate Execution Time B 1 estimating memory use C 1 Ethernet driver 2 1 Ethernet network assign IP address 1 1 communicate with a PanelView terminal 6 1 communicate with an RSView32 project 7 1 configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 configure a 1794 AENx module 1 1 configure an Ethernet driver 2 1 determine when data is updated D 1 program over an 2 1 send a message 5 1 execution time B 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 Index F fault module 15 1 FlexLogix controller ControlNet network 11 1 DF1 network 22 1 DH 485 network 19 1 1 0 1747 20 1 1756 3 1 8 1 1771 9 1 20 1 1791 20 1 1794 4 1 10 1 20 1 determine when data is updated D 1 DeviceNet 16 1 fault 15 1 instruction execution time B 1 memory use C 1 IP address assign 1 1 L LED RS232 19 10 Maintain the Battery 25 1 Map a PLC SLC Address A 1 memory array indexes C 9 controller usage C 1 sign extension C 1 zero fill C 2 messages
55. on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying I Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 5 J Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms K Inhibit Module Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 J In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked u
56. select Topic Configuration F In the bottom left corner of the window click New G Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 15 H Click the Data Collection tab I Specify the following parameters For this item Do this Processor Type Select PLC 5 Data Collection Mode 1 Clear the Polled Messages check box 2 Select the Unsolicited Messages check box J Click the Advanced Communication tab K Specify the following parameters For this item Type or select Communication Driver driver for the network across which you will send the message Station slot number of the controllerthat is sending the message Local or Remote Addressing Remote L In the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box specify the following parameters For this parameter Type or select Bridge Device 1785 KA5 Bridge 5130 KA Local ID Virtual Link ID from Step D Local KA5 arbitrary number between 1 and 107 RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does notuse the entry Remote ID number that designates the backplane of the ControlLogix chassis Use a different number for each backplane M Click OK N Click Done and confirm the update of the topic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 16 Communicate with RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Add the 175
57. you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finisb Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 18 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG 4 Message Control E DN5 e A CER gt e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag_name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name o controller controller and click OK e condition p MSG e J E J E Type Unconfigured CEND e Message Control message DN ER gt Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working wi
58. 0 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element logical address such as N7 0 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse 2 address 1 0 where logical address such as F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the 1756 CNB module and click OK In the Patb text box add address is the ControlNet node number of the workstation EXAMPLE Complete path entry washer chassis 2 5 1 0 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 21 G On the Communication tab specify the following parameters For this item Communication Method Type or select CIP With Source ID Sour
59. 1 0 over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control devices that are wired to 1756 I O dules Procedure Dom local modules e remote modules where 1756 CNB modules connect the local and remote chassis over a ControlNet network Controller Local 1 0 Remote 1 0 d ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 CNB Modules ControlNet Network 42045 How to Use This Procedure complete this procedure do the following steps IMPORTANT If the all the I O modules are in the same chassis as the controller no remote I O go to Add I O Modules on page 8 6 e Add the Local 1756 CNB Module Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module Add I O Modules Create Aliases Schedule the ControlNet Network e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 2 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add the Local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 51 9 Tasks 25m MainTask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types User Defined pun Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration
60. 1 26 Chapter 2 When to Use This 2 1 How to Use This 2 1 Configure an Ethernet 2 2 Selecta ea hes E Sie NEA a RA 2 3 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table of Contents ii Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 3 When to Use This 3 1 Before You anaua naaa 3 1 How to Use This 3 2 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 3 3 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 3 5 Add Os MOINES ta de eue ant etd dict 3 8 Create AMASES S Lease ee doy T bu E YR UA EF Ron 3 12 Validate 3 15 Chapter 4 When to Use This 4 1 Before You Use This Procedure 4 2 How to Use This Procedure 4 2 Add the local 1756 ENBx or ENET module 4 3 Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module 4 5 Add I O Modules 4 8 Address VO angues er qose n Ss qn Se Qe d ee op esd eth 4 11 Validate
61. 1 Units Maximum 100 Offset 0 Data Defaut 4243 C Specify the properties of the tag Data Source Y Type Device C Memory id Address B 42432 Click Device Click Select the name of the node that you created in Create a Polled Node and click OK Click Communicate with RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 13 Node Local H Click the sign Node Local topic 1 topic 2 I Next to the topic from Create a Polled Topic click the sign tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project 1 M9 tags in the ControlLogix controller amp Node Local topic 1 topic 2 Offline Online J Next to Offline click the sign controller scope tags p F amp F Node Local arrays and structures at the controller scope program p scope tags topic 1 topic 2 Offline array 1 counter 1 Program MainProgram Online K On the left select the entry that contains the required tag address Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 14 Communicate with an RS
62. 13 5 DF1 MasterMessage Transmit GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 MaxStationAddress GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 NAKReceiveLimit GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 NormalPollGroupSize GSV 23 0 20 5 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 19 Object Attribute Instruction True Time Ls 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX DF1 PendingACKTimeout SSV 22 4 92 1 DF1 PendingDuplicateDetection SSV 19 8 90 1 DF1 PendingEmbeddedResponseEnable SSV 21 7 91 6 DF1 PendingENOTransmitLimit SSV 21 2 91 2 DF1 PendingEOT Suppression SSV 21 2 91 2 DF1 PendingErrorDetection SSV 21 9 91 7 DF1 PendingMasterMessage Transmit SSV 21 7 91 6 DF1 PendingMaxStationAddress SSV 21 6 91 6 DF1 PendingNAKReceiveLimit SSV 21 2 91 2 DF1 PendingNormalPollGroupSize SSV 21 8 91 8 DF1 PendingPollingMode SSV 21 6 91 6 DF1 PendingReplyMessageWait SSV 22 4 92 2 DF1 PendingSlavePollTimeout SSV 22 4 92 1 DF1 PendingStationAddress SSV 22 1 92 0 DF1 PendingTokenHoldFactor SSV 104 9 91 4 DF1 PendingTransmitRetries SSV 21 2 91 2 DF1 PollingMode GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 ReplyMessageWait GSV 24 8 22 0 DF1 SlavePollTimeout GSV 24 8 22 0 DF1 StationAddress GSV 23 0 20 5 DF1 TokenHoldFactor GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 TransmitRetries GSV 14 8 13 5 FAULTLOG MajorEvents GSV 24 1 19 7 FAULTLOG MajorEvents SSV 15 2
63. 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET 21794 AENx y name of rail a dda 1794 1 0 module here 2 Right click the AEN module and select New Module 3 Select the type of module and click OK 4 _y Name Slot E 4 5 Description xj 6 Comm Format Revision 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt 7 42420 4 name for module 5 or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over EtherNet IP Network 4 9 6 Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data update faster than the of the nput Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Input Data None digital input output Comm Format of the AEN is update at the RPI of the AEN Rack Optimization update faster than the ofthe Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Data None digital output Comm Format of the AEN is update at the RPI of the AEN Rack Optimization Pape UE RUE update faster than the RPI ofthe Output Data AEN Comm Format of the AEN is p Output Data None analog p Data 7 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then s
64. 2 9 LN REAL 192 9 181 9 LOG REAL 193 3 182 3 LOWER n a 75 x 1 4 6 4 x 1 1 x number of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B MAAT n a 173 110 MAG n a 862 523 MAH switch marker n a 70 48 MAJ n a 227 107 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 7 Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx MAJ w merge n a 394 247 MAM n a 471 263 MAM w merge n a 665 349 MAPC n a 479 295 MAR n a 168 109 MAS all w move and n a 331 205 jog running MAS individual n a 110 71 motion types MASD n a 135 89 MASR n a 40 29 MATC n a 149 103 MAW n a 161 108 MCCP cubic n a 518 304 MCCP linear n a 178 105 MCD n a 84 62 MCR n a 0 1 0 1 MDR n a 146 97 MDW n a 136 90 MEO DINT 0 59 0 6 MGPS fast shutdown n a 65 43 w move and jog running MGPS fast stop w n a 69 43 move and jog running MGPS hard n a 58 44 shutdown w move and jog running MGS w move and n a 70 53 jog running MGSD n a 62 42 MGSR n a 67 43 MID n a 10 2 1 6 8 5 x 1 3 of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B MOD DINT 20 3 18 0 MOD REAL 64 1 57 2 MOV DINT DINT 0 5 0 4 MOV REAL REAL 0 8 0 8 Pu
65. 63 4 SCRV 268 78 SEL 15 13 SETD 10 0 SIN 230 215 SNEG 16 14 SOC 239 68 SOR 39 29 SRTP 155 00 SSUM 32 x 28 9 25 x 17 2 X number of samples SUB 12 11 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Execution Time B 27 Table B 5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions Continued Instruction Time us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx TAN 291 273 TOD 16 12 TOFR 48 35 TONR 52 35 TOT 118 83 TRN 14 11 UPDN 27 20 XOR 2 1 XPY 401 374 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 28 Estimate Execution Time Estimate Execution Time of Use the following table to determine the time required for the controller to execute various motion actions a Motion Action Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 6 Execution Times for Motion Actions Motion state or action Logix5550 average Logix5555 average per axis execution time us execution time us motion task overhead 233 131 servo axis 179 115 virtual axis A 172 105 consumed axis ggg 57311 auto tag AXIS SERVO data type 197 114 update AXIS SERVO DRIVE data type AXIS VIRTUAL data type AXIS CONSUMED data 108 79 type servo on A 33 19 trap move A 230 135 S curve move A 358 213 trap jog A 220 124 S curve jog A 328 197 gearing actual A 266 158 clutch A 166 72 gearing comma
66. 7 Connect the 1 7 Connect to the 1 8 Configure the 1 10 Check the Modulen ake ACER 1 12 Configure a Module Using RSLinx Software 1 13 Connect the 1 13 Configure the 1 13 Check the 1 15 Configure a Module Using BOOTP 1 16 Install BOOTPServer Software 1 16 Connect the 1 16 Enter the Default Network 1 17 Configure the Module 1 18 Disable 1 19 Save the Relation 145 1 19 Renew the IP Address of a 1794 AENx 1 20 Install BOOTPServer Software 1 20 Set Up the 1 20 Enter the New Configuration 1 21 Send the 1 22 Disable BOOTP ated aise Qe Yee Be E 1 22 Save the Relation 145 1 23 Test the 1 24 Connect Directly to a Controller 1 24 Connect a Serial 1 24 Configure a Serial
67. Add the SERCOS Drive e Create a Motion Group Assign the Properties of the Motion Group Configure the Axis Run Hookup Tests Develop Logic for Motion Control For more information see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 If your controller uses a motion axis you must define a device in the chassis as a coordinated system time CST master This synchronizes all servo modules and controllers in the chassis to the same system clock IMPORTANT Only one device in a chassis can be the CST master You have the following options Define the Controller as the CST Master or e Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master Program Motion Control 24 3 Define the Controller as the CST Master 1 In the controller organizer right click the Controller folder and select Properties 2 Click the Date Time tab 3 Is another controller in the chassis the CST master If Then No Select the Make this controller the master check box Yes Clear the Make this controller the master check box 4 Click OK Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master 1 In the controller organizer right click the 1756 SYNCH module and choose Properties 2 Click the Time Mastership tab General Connection Associated Axes SynchLink Configuration d 3 Select this check box n Make this module the Coordinated Make this module the Cot System Time Master for the chassis
68. B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D Name Slot 0 E zl Revision in Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F Description 42377 D Type a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 3 H Inhibit Module Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid
69. Backplane 1756 Ax T xx 1756 Lx Select the ControlLogix controller Choose Apply and confirm the update Click the Data Collection tab Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 5 DataSource Data Collection Advanced Communication Processor Type 1 ogix5000 Data Collection Mode Polled Messages mSec i000 I Type the update Unsolicited Messages rate ms for the J Gache Unsolicited Data data J Send all Gnsolieitedinpdates Communications Time Out Secs 20 J Click the Use Symbols 8 Symbols check box Limit Maximum Packets 20 42428 Select Tag Name Database 2x Look in a Projects c Samples Your_RSLogix5000_Project Files of type Cancel 43083 Select RSLogix 5000 L Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic M Choose Open N Choose Done and then Yes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 6 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create a Polled Node A Open the RSView project ime YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your RSView Project Edit Mode a Your RSView Project J E System Project Settings Channel Channel Je Node B amp Node 110 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts a Activity L
70. CX EE E 21 4 Chapter 22 When to Use this Procedure 22 1 How to Use This 22 2 Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems 22 2 Step 2 Select a Polling 22 3 Step 3 Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling 22 3 Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based POE o ux ducted 22 8 Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller 22 10 Step 6 Enter 22 12 Step 7 Configure the 22 14 Step 8 Stagger the Messages ios m C tn 0 22 17 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table of Contents viii Configure Dial Up Communications Program Motion Control Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 23 When to Use this Procedure 23 1 How to Use This 23 1 Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems 23 2 Step 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Controller 23 3 Step 3 Dial the Other 23 5 Step 4 Send the Message 23 6 Step 5 Configure the 23 8 St p 6 Bare pus eetere me dri eror eer cede ig ante Uae 23 11 Step 7 Stagger 5 23 12 Chapter 24 When to
71. DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 Routing table for the left 1756 DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756 DHRIO module E Backplane Link 10 El Backplane Link 30 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 E 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel DH Link 20 Channel DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined Channel B DH Link Undefined fj 1756 Slot 1 1756 CNB Slot 1 E CNET Link 100 El CNET Link 100 fj 1756 Network address 2 2 8 1756 CNB Network address 1 El Backplane Link 30 Backplane Link 10 9 1755 DHRID Slot 0 9 1755 DHRID Slot 0 Channel DH Link 40 Channel 4 DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined Channel B DH Link Undefined 42190 42191 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Step A For each network and each ControlLogix backplane in your system designate a unique link ID number Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 5 Configure a routing table for each 1756 DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller Detailed actions Here is an example ControlNet network link ID 100 DIC HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane link ID 10 0 DH network link ID 20 D C HIN ControlLogix R B backplane link ID 30 0 DH network link ID 40 B Connect the hardware 1 Install the 1756 DHRIO module 2 Connect the chassis to a network
72. E ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix chassis x IL chassis EEEN 0 puu 1756 CP3 or 1747 CP3 serial cable Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Use RSLinx software to assign P address required subnet mask recommended gateway address optional domain name optional DNS server addresses Coptional Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 5 BOOTP Server Software To configure a module over an EtherNet IP network use any of the following BOOTP server software e BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation any BOOTP server software that is commercially available BOOTP server software P S E N ControlLogix B chassis EEE L switch P S A EtherNet IP network Flex 1 0 The default setting for a Rockwell Automation EtherNet IP module is to use BOOTP to get its configuration information e At power up the module sends a message with its hardware address to the BOOTP server The BOOTP server sends the appropriate configuration to the module The BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation lets you assign e IP address required e subnet mask recommended gateway address optional Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 6 Configure EtherNet IP Module How to
73. EN P November 2001 Chapter 10 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1794 I O modules when a e 1756 CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network 1794 ACN adapter connects the 1794 I O modules to the same ControlNet network CELIN 5555555555555595 Y 5555555535533503 5 2 8 42436 ControlNet network How to Use This Procedure have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step Add the local 1756 CNB module To complete this procedure do the following steps Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module Add I O Modules Create Aliases Schedule the ControlNet Network To check your work do the following step e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 2 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Add the local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline module 5 5 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 51 9 Tasks 3 48 MainTask 5 29 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types Ca User Defined Ca Predefined i Module Defined 3 140 Configuration ag B E o 42376
74. If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 I In step F did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 9 K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 10 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your pr
75. MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the other controller Where dint array condition fal control FAL 4 CRES 4 File Arith Logical Control fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN MSG iE 4 Type Unconfigured __ Message Control message gt Is an 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 19 8 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 4 Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click Table 19 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If the data is structure s And you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type
76. Message Type Block Transfer Write Source Tag int_buffer_write 0 Number Of Elements number of INTs to write 3 Click the Communication tab 4 Click Browse 5 Select the RIO MODULE and click OK 6 How many devices require block transfer instructions If Then 16 or less devices Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked more than 16 devices A Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates Is this message to one of those devices If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box 7 Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Read or Write Data From Multiple Block Transfer Modules Input data from the first BT module Input data from the next BT module Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 15 Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order D Datafroma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Wodi gt BT_int_buffer_read 0 BT input 0 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 BT input 0 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 BT
77. Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 C Click the Communication tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 0 Since dial up communications are point to point the actual address of the controller is not required E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP e Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Configure Dial Up Communications 23 11 Step 6 Hang Up Enter the following logic to hang up After the remote controller receives the message message DN is on the AHL turns off the DTR line which causes the modem to hang up message DN a EE modem hangup 1 EM J AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Channel 0 AND Mask 1 OR Mask 0 SerialPort Control modem hangup 1 Channel Status Decimal 0 After the modem hangs up modem hangup 1 EM is on the AHL instruction turns on the DTR line which readies the modem for the next call Where message AHL ASCII Handshake Lines CEN gt Ch
78. Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 18 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 905 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 14 Communicate with an RSView Project over ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the Procedure following types of RSView projects e RSView32 project RSView Machine Edition project developed with RSView Studio software RSView32 or RSView Machine Edition p
79. Project x Edit Mode a Your RSView Project J E System Project Settings Channel Channel Je Node B amp Node 110 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts 5 Activity Log Setup I Scan Class Tag Database ie Tag Monitor 43081 User Accounts 4 B Double click Node Data Source Direct Driver C DDE Server D Name v Enabled Server Name El q4 E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click 8 F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G In the Access Path box type the name of the topic from Create a Unsolicited Topic H Click Accept I Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 E Create an Unsolicited Tag Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 23 im YOUR RSVIEw PROJECT RSV Project Explorer Your RSView Project xj a Your RSView Project C3 System Project Settings Channel gt Node 11 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts mtb ie Edit Mode Channel amp Node 1 Scan Class Activity Log Setup Tag Database Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Ta 9 Type Analog Security Description Minimum 0 Scale 1 Units Maximum 100 Offs
80. Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 16 Program Motion Control 1756 M08SE Select the Motor and Feedback 1 Dynamics Gains Output Limits Offset Faul General Units Conversion Drive Motor Feedback Homing Motor 2 Catalog Number 3 A Feedback Type none v 43030 1 Click the Motor Feedback tab 2 Select the catalog number of the motor 3 In step 2 did you select a catalog number If Then Yes Go to step 4 No Select the type of feedback 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Program Motion Control 24 17 Run Hookup Tests se tests E is ith th ATTENTION These tests may cause an axis to move even with the controller in program mode After you complete the Test Output amp Feedback test do not change the polarity This may cause an axis runaway condition To run the hookup diagnostics for an axis Download Your Project and Go Online Display the Properties for the Axis Complete the Hookup Tests Download Your Project and Go Online 1 Create and configure all the motion modules and axes 2 Save your project 3 Download your project 4 Verify that a connection is established with each module in the I O configuration of the controller 5 For each SERCOS drive make sure that the drive goes to Step 4 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 18 Program Motion Control Display the Properties fo
81. Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Complete this step for any message that a PLC 5C controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over an ControlNet network This procedure uses RSLogix 5 software revision 3 x A Using RSLogix 5 software open the project for the PLC 5 controller B Display the set up screen for the message C Specify the following parameters For this section And this item Specify This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 MultiHop Yes Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet
82. Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 18 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG 4 Message Control E DN5 e A CER gt e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag_name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name o controller controlle
83. Then Download PanelBuilder32 application to the terminal C Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software D Has this network been scheduled before From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes gt CO ON From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the N
84. Unscheduled button 2 From the Node Name list select the controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 15 G Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller If the tag is And its data the Specify type is scheduled bit PanelView writes the data SIO x y PanelView reads the data SOO x y INT PanelView writes the data 510 PanelView reads the data 500 unscheduled bit p tag_name z INT name of INT or REAL tag that stores the data in the REAL un ControlLogix controller Where Is element of the PanelView input output structure in the controller y bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element tag_name name of the tag that you created in the controller to exchange bits with the PanelView terminal 2 bit number 0 to 15 EXAMPLE Specify the address of a tag the ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PanelView Application name of panelview l Data 0 1 10 0 1 name of panelview O Data 3 00 3 station_1_status 3 station_1_status 3 pv_write_1 H Click OK I Click OK pv_write_1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 16 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network If No CO CO CO
85. Use This 20 2 Add a 1756 DHRIO Module 20 3 Add a Remote I O 20 6 Add a Block Transfer Module 20 9 Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module 20 10 Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 20 11 Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer 01 cci Dep cote den re e ertet il 20 13 Configure the Messages va oa dd es 462 EX VECES CT 20 14 Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules 20 15 Create a User Defined Data 20 17 Create Data 20 18 Send the Message to a BT Module 20 19 Enter the Message Properties for Each Module 20 21 Convert the INTs to 20 22 Step to the Next BT 20 23 Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules 20 24 Address TO mpe ace xps wee REC RAE ACA 20 26 Validate 20 28 Stagger 20 30 Chapter 21 When to Use this Procedure 21 1 How to Use This 21 1 Step 1 Connect a Serial 21 2 Step 2 Configure a Serial 21 3 Step Se Select a Path 9
86. Use This 24 1 How to Use This 24 2 Select a CST Master 24 2 Define the Controller as the CST Master 24 3 Define a 1756 SYNCH Module as the CST Master 24 3 Add the Motion Module 24 4 1756 MO8SE Add the SERCOS 24 7 Create Motion 24 9 Assign the Properties of the Motion Group 24 10 Configure the AX S 24 12 Display the Properties for the 24 12 Select an Axis 24 12 Assign Units for 24 13 Assign a Conversion Constant 24 13 1756 MO2AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive 24 14 1756 MO8SE Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier 24 15 1756 MO8SE Select the Motor and Feedback 24 16 R n Hookup 24 17 Download Your Project and Go Online 24 17 Display the Properties for the 24 18 Complete the Hookup Tests siu eu qe cxt 24 18 Develop Logic for Motion 24 19 Handle Motion 24 20 Chapter 25 When to Use This 25 1 How to Use This 25 1 Est
87. Use This Procedure Use the following table to find the information that you need If you have this And you want Then See page module 1756 ENBx configure the module via another module that is in Configure a Module Using RSLogix 5000 1 7 1756 ENET the chassis e g controller 1756 CNB Software 1756 DHRIO or Configure a Module Using RSLinx 1 13 Software Note Both software let you configure the module Use the one that you prefer configure the module directly over an EtherNet IP Configure a Module Using BOOTP 1 16 network 1794 AENx configure the module Configure a Module Using BOOTP 1 16 re establish communication because either Renew the IP Address of a 1794 AENx 1 20 e The configuration of the module is incorrect for your network e You do not know the IP address of the module any make sure that you can communicate with the Test the Configuration 1 24 module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 7 Configure a Module Using To configure a module using RSLogix 5000 software RSLogix 5000 Software ere Connect to the Module Configure the Port Check the Module Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module 2 Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure To set up communication between your computer and a controller see
88. Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure Dial Up Communications 23 7 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs EXAMPLE Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When serial port 1 3 turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller serial port 11 3 message EN MSG iE HE Type Unconfigured EN Message Control message CDN gt I CER gt message DN fal_control FAL iE lt RES gt File Arith Logical EN Control fal_control Length CDND Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint_array fal_control pos Expression int_buffer fal_control pos EXAMPLE Write integers to PLC 5 controller When serial port 1 5 turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the other controller serial port 1 3 fal control FAL iE RES File Arith Logical EN Control fal control
89. When to Use This 17 1 How to Use This 17 2 Configure Routing Tables 17 3 Configure a 1756 DHRIO 1 17 8 Add a 1756 DHRIO 17 11 Enter a Message 17 14 Configure the Message 17 16 Stagger the 17 20 Access ControlLogix Data 17 20 Chapter 18 When to Use This 18 1 Configure Routing Tables 18 2 Configure a PLC 5 or SLC 500 Message 18 6 Chapter 19 When to Use this Procedure 19 1 How to Use This 19 2 Step 1 Connect the Controller to an 19 3 Step 2 Configure the Serial Port 19 4 Step 3 Enter a 19 6 Step 4 Configure the 19 8 Step 5 Check the 19 10 Step 6 Stagger the 19 10 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Table of Contents vii Chapter 20 When to Use This 20 1 How to
90. a DH network If the controllers are on And there is Then the message is same network only ControlLogix controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix remote controller in the chassis different networks remote Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 21 This procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller B If the message is from a SLC 500 controller in the MSG instruction specify the following For this For a Select Target Device gt 5 Local Remote local message Local remote message Remote C Display the set up screen for the message D Select a set up Table 17 D Set up for a message from a PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller For a local message In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local DH Node Octal node nu
91. after BAT LED turns on Power off 100 Power off 50 Yearly power oft 100 decrease 1756 L1 60 C 8 months 8 months 24 16 days 25 C 18 5 months 30 5 months 16 28 days 0 C 20 2 months 33 7 months 16 31 days 1756 L1M1 60 C 5 6 months 8 months 24 8 days 2I b 13 6 months 22 9 months 16 20 days 0 C 16 8 months 21 9 months 1696 25 days 1756 L1M2 60 C 4 months 7 4 months 2496 6 days 25 11 7 months 20 1 months 6 18 days 0 16 0 months 26 6 months 6 24 days 1756 L1M3 60 C 2 6 months 4 9 months 24 4 days 25 9 1 months 16 2 months 16 14 days 0 C 14 4 months 24 4 months 16 22 days 1756 L55M12 60 C 57 days 110 days 23 69 hours peg 63 days 123 days 17 76 hours 0 C 60 days 118 days 7 73 hours 1756 L55M14 60 C 29 days 57 days 2396 35 hours 29 30 days 61 days 1796 37 hours 0 C 24 days 48 days 1796 30 hours 1756 L55M16 60 C 15 days 30 days 2396 18 hours 25 13 days 27 days 7 16 hours 0 C 6 days 12 days 36 7 hours 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 Use the values for the 1756 L55M13 controller 1756 L55M24 Use the values for the 1756 L55M14 controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 25 4 Maintain the 1756 1 Battery Store Replacement Batteries Replace a Battery Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Because a battery may leak potentially dangerous chemicals if stored improperly store batteries as follows ATTENT
92. and 254 for this controller P Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 12 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 6 Entera Message Regardless of whether you use standard polling or message based polling you must use a MSG instruction to transfer data between controllers A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG e J E 4 E Message Message Control Bg DND e A ER e e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name of controller controller and click OK e condition 4 E MSG e J 4 F Type Unconfigured Message Control message M DN e CER e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16
93. and select New Module FlexLogix controller right click the 1788 CNC module and select New Module ControlLogix controller right click remote 1756 CNB module and select New Module B Select the type of controller and click OK D Name 50 Slot p Description E zl Revision imi a Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F 42377 the name of the controller D Type or select the location of the controller If Type or select PLC 5C controller ControlNet node number of the controller FlexLogix controller always 0 ControlLogix controller slot number of the controller E How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab does not apply to a FlexLogix controller If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 11 F Click Next H J Inhibit Module Majo Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 G Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box Inhibit a module To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time 1 Initially inhibit all the modules
94. e Step 7 Configure the Message Step 8 Stagger the Messages For additional information see SCADA System Application Guide publication AG 6 5 8 Step 1 Connect and A Using the following Allen Bradley cable connect each controller C The cable has the following wiring controller modem 9 pin female 25 pin male DCD 1 Pp 8 RXD 2 Pp 3 TXD 3 gt 2 DTR 4 20 COMMON 5 7 DSR 6 6 RTS 7 gt 4 CTS 8 5 Configure the modems Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 3 Step 2 Selecta Polling Determine if you will use standard polling or message based polling Mode If Then go to On page data is time critical Step 3 Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling 22 3 slave controllers will initiate messages you want to use logic to control when communication Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling 22 8 occurs Step 3 Configure the Determine if you must complete this step Master Controller for 7 you are using this polling mode Then Standard Polling standard Complete this step message based Go to Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling A Open the RSLogix 5000 project Jj Ex Controller name of controller Controller Tage 4 23 Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler E Tas
95. except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 10 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 9 From the File menu choose Save 10 Download the project to the controller Configure the Port 1 In the controller organizer right click the ENB or ENET module and select Properties 2 Click the Port Configuration tab 4 gt Sa por Riess ECA 6 EE 3 42423 3 Clear uncheck the Enable Bootp check box 4 Type the IP address of the module 5 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 6 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure an EtherNet IP Module 1 11 7 Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet IP devices d e When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or ENET module will you use a host name instead of an IP address If Then Yes Go to step 8 No Go to step 10 4
96. go to needs regular delivery at a rate that you Create a Polled Topic on page 7 4 specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in Create a Unsolicited Topic on page 7 14 your application Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create a Polled Topic p software whenever you create a project save a project RSLogix 5000 software revision 10 0 or later automatically creates DDE OPC topics in RSLinx change the revision of a project to 10 0 or later In some cases you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software as shown in steps E G of this section A Display RSLinx software B From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration C In the bottom left corner of the window click New D Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key To expand a network one level do one Data Source of the following Double click the network a Select the network and press p gt AB ETH x Ethernet Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 the key e Click the sign E On the Data Source tab expand the ETH x driver until you F G H see the ControlLogix controller Data Source Workstation AB ETH x Ethernet XXX XXX XXX XXX 1756 ENBx
97. message E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP e Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 19 10 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 5 Check the LED Once you download the project to the controller use the RS232 LED on the front of the controller to determine if there are other stations on the DH 485 network RUN EN 10 EN n5232 BAT OK RUN REM PROG 42525 If the RS232 LED is Then flashing There are no other stations on the DH 485 network steady There is at least one other station on the DH 485 network Step 6 Stagger the As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Messages Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups t
98. messages to e ControlLogix controller If Then e FlexLogix controller Em 16 or less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 Logix5000 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the most frequent controllers messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box H Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 20 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Access ControlLogix Data Complete this task for any message that a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over
99. network C Power up the chassis D Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following Double click the network Linx Gateways Ethernet Select the network and press the Fr AB 1 key e Click the sign E Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax FF 1756 DHRIO F Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration Click the Channel Configuration tab Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 10 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 42193 H If Channel A is configured for DH type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel I If Channel B is configured for DH type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel J To download the configuration to the module choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Add 1756 DHRIO Module Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 11 Determine if you must complete this task If a Then ControlLogix controller sends the message Compl
100. not provide sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp Integer Data wiring_mode isolated or temperature measuring analog input 25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data sample time must be less than 25 ms time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data analog output associated inputs are REALs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data associated inputs are INTs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 10 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Name Slot 4 Description gt Comm Format Revision 1 nd Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42420 G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms J Inhibit Module K Major Fault On Controller If Connect
101. on a e different DH network different type of network such as a ControlNet network In the following example ControlLogix chassis route messages to controllers that are on different networks EXAMPLE Route messages from a DH network ControlNet node 3 TU Remote Message ControlNet ControlNet network node 1 DIC HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane 0 channel A DH node 2 DH network DH node 1 cg c Remote Message ControlNet node 2 DIC HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane 0 channel DH node 3 DH network DH node 4 norma Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 18 2 Configure Routing Tables Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network The modules us destination e the routing tables to send the message to the In this task you configure routing tables for 1756 DHRIO modules In the following example two ControlLogix chassis link different networks together via a ControlNet network EXAMPLE Routing table E 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 5 8 1756 CNB Slot 1 Channel DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined CNET Link 100 lJ 1756 CNB Network address 2 Backplane Link 30 amp B 1756 DHRIO Slot 0 Channel DH Link 40 Ch
102. previous procedure do the following preliminary task Add the Local 1756 CNB Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add the 1771 ACN Module Communicate with Block Transfer Modules using either of these procedures Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules e Address I O e Schedule the ControlNet Network e Validate Connections e Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 3 Add the Local 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 51 9 Tasks 25m MainTask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types User Defined pun Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration m B E B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D Name Slot 0 E Description a Revision in Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F 42377 D a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot ma
103. remains on after you complete Step 2 contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor LOGIX 5550 cc ETE Barrer battery label 41025 F Attach the battery label 1 Write on the battery label the date you install the battery 2 Attach the label to the inside of the controller door G Dispose the old battery according to state and local regulations ATTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose lithium batteries in general trash collection They may explode or rupture violently Follow state and local regulations for disposal of these materials You are legally responsible for hazards created while your battery is being disposed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 25 6 Maintain the 1756 1 Battery Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 a PLC SLC Address When To Use This Use this procedure if you are sending a message from a PLC 5 or Procedure SLC 500 controller to a ControlLogix controller and the PLC SLC controller does not support Logical ASCII addressing To use a logical address e g N7 0 to specify a value tag in a ControlLogix controller you must map files to tags You only have to map the file numbers that are used in messages the other file numbers do not need to be mapped e The
104. select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name D From the Scope list select name of controller controller and click OK e condition MSG e lE JE Type Unconfigured Message Control message ER gt e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to an SLC 500 or MicroLogix controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers require 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 7 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a MicroLogix controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix Write integers to a MicroLogix controller controller condition
105. tag address Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 14 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Node Local topic 1 topic 2 controller scope tags Offline arrays and structures at array 1 the controller scope counter 1 program w Program MainProgram scope tags Online bool 1 dint 1 real 1 single elementtags BOOLs DINTs REALs etc L On the right double click the tag that contains the required data i e the address for the RSView tag M Click Accept If this is an RSView32 project go to Validate an RSView32 Tag Create a Unsolicited Topic A Display RSLinx software B From the Communications menu select Configure Client Applications C Click the Virtual Link ID tab D Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations If Then Yes 1 Record the Virtual Link ID number which you will use in subsequent steps Click OK N No N Click OK co D Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation Close the RSLinx software If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service you must also stop the service Re open the RSLinx software E From the DDE OPC menu
106. that you can access from your workstation For example perform one of the following e Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module e Connect each chassis to an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DH network 3 Power up each chassis Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 6 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Step Detailed actions C Display the routing table 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network af e Select the network and press the Fr AB_DFI x DF1 key e Click the 4 sign Linx Gateways Ethernet 2 Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax pe 1756 DHRIO 3 Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration 4 Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab D Define the link ID of the backplane At the top of the routing table right click the backplane link and choose in which the 1756 DHRIO module Edit Module resides Type the link ID of the backplane and choose OK N E Define the link IDs of the 1 Righ
107. the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this publication notes may be used to make you aware of safety considerations The following annotations and their accompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazard avoid a potential hazard and recognize the consequences of a potential hazard Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Introduction Updated Information Summary of Changes This release of this document contains new and updated information To find new and updated information look for change bars as shown next to this paragraph The document contains the following changes This new or updated information Starts on page Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 1 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 1 Communicate with an RSView Project over ControlNet Network 14 1 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Ne
108. the controller to Upload RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller Download Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 4 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 3 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This S e to monitor and control devices that wired to 1756 5 ee local modules e remote modules where 1756 ENBx or 1756 ENET B modules connect the local and remote chassis over an EtherNet IP network Local 1 0 Controller Remote 1 0 ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or ENET B Modules 42608 switch Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To communicate with 1756 I O over an EtherNet IP network you must use 1756 ENBx or ENET B modules If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the ENB or ENET modules in the local and remote chassis Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 2 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet I
109. the data is integer s And you want to read receive data Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 19 For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Click the Communication tab Is the other controller in the I O configuration If Then Yes 1 Select the other controller and choose OK 2 Go to step K
110. want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 16 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 11 Communicate with Another Controller over ControlNet Network Use this procedure to send a message from one controller to another controller over an ControlNet network ControlLogix controller to another Controllogix controller ControlLogix controller to a FLexlogix controller ControlLogix controller to a PLC 5 controller PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PLC 5 Controller D oF qa ET ELT ControlNet Network ControlLogix Controller FlexLogix Controller 42519 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 2 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network How to Use This Proce
111. you 32 bits for push buttons indicators etc 2 For each PanelView screen create a DINT array with enough elements for the word level objects on the screen For example the DINT 28 array give you 28 values for numeric entry controls numeric displays etc To access the I O tags of the PanelView use the following address format Table 6 A Address format for the 1 0 tags of a PanelView If the PanelView writes the data name of panelview I Data x y Then use this address PanelView reads the data name of panelview O Data x y Where Is name of panelview ofthe PanelView instance in the 1 0 configuration of the controller element of the PanelView input or output 0 structure y bit number within the input or output element Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 9 To address the PanelView data in your logic you can have the following options e address the tags directly copy the tags to other tags in your project create alias tags EXAMPLE Address PanelView data This rung uses these I O tags of the PanelView a I Data 2 0 and pu a I Data 2 1 The rung controls a motor pv al Data 2 0 pv al Data 2 1 motor on motor on When a push button on the PanelView is pressed this rung clears a value The push button uses bit 4 of the screen a bit array screen a bit 4 LR Clear Dest value 3 0e This rung m
112. you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gesrablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 k A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Wiesen ree Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over ControlNet Network 10 15 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you
113. 0 software CD B On the CD find the following file language Tools Tag Import Utility Logix 5000 Tag Import msi where language is the language of your software For example for software that is in English open the Enu folder C Copy the file to your computer D To install the utility open the file Use the Utility to Create a CSV File A Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility m Data source Node name 4 Scan class Logix 5000 tags Tag file name Browse p C Filter Search 43 D Put tags into folder Add FS Lins topic to tag address 43071 Type the name of the node from Create a Polled Node C Select the L5K file D Choose Search Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 E Select the tags to import Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 9 F Type the name of the topic from Create a Polled Topic G H Choose OK Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 10 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Import the CSV File A Start the Database Import amp Export wizard Start Programs gt Rockwell Software RSView Studio Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard Start Programs Rockwell Software RSView32 Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard B Complete the screens of the wizard Dat
114. 00 E Click Apply F Click the System Protocol tab Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network 19 5 Major Faults MinorFauts Date andTime Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Error Detection C CRC H i Station Address 0 FF Enable Duplicate Detection 42588 G Protocol G Select DH485 H Type the address of the controller on the DH 485 network Follow these guidelines Address 0 is typically reserved for the programming tool Address 1 is typically left open to swap out a controller Most controllers have a default address of 1 e The maximum address is 31 To optimize network performance assign addresses in sequential order Assign initiators such as personal computers the lowest addresses This minimizes the time required to initialize the network I Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 19 6 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Step 3 Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG J F j E Message Message Control E DN5 e A CERO e e 42424 B In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key C In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and
115. 001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 905 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 27 Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Program a message to communicate with multiple devices Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules on page 9 12 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 28 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D
116. 007 project for the ControlLogix controller ENET Module that sends the message ag Controller name of controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 21 9 Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types i User Defined i Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration ag 42316 Qv E m Is the local ENB module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Enter a Message no Right click O Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over EtherNet IP Network 5 15 D 85 Name punl Address Host Name Description m C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt E Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revisi
117. 01 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 5 Add the 1771 ACN Module 1 0 Configuration i 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1771 ACN that is in the remote chassis and click OK _y Name Node lt q D Description Input Size 4 El Output Size Comm Format Rack Optimization 4 E Revision ml E Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42434 C Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Specify the Input Size and Output Size Ifthe chassis uses Then type or select Example 2 slot addressing number of slots in the chassis 2 For a 4 slot chassis specify 2 for the input and output sizes 1 slot addressing number of slots in the chassis For a 4 slot chassis specify 4 for the input and output sizes 1 2 slot addressing number of slots in the chassis x2 For a 4 slot chassis specify 8 for the input and output sizes F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 6 Communicate with 1771 1 0
118. 1 For each function block instruction add the time from Table B 5 on page B 24 2 For each IREF and OREF add the following time Skip any immediate values For an With a data type Add us us 1756 11 11 1756 L55Mx IREF BOOL 0 56 0 55 DINT 0 62 0 60 REAL 1 00 0 96 OREF BOOL 0 16 0 16 DINT 0 16 0 16 REAL 0 16 0 15 3 For each wire add the following time If the wire connects a Add us 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx BOOL to BOOL 0 40 0 39 DINT to DINT 0 46 0 45 DINT to REAL 8 98 7 32 REAL to DINT 13 26 10 59 REAL to REAL 0 83 0 81 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 Estimate Execution Time Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate the execution time of a function block routine for a 1756 L1 controller 0 62 us for DINT IREF 1 us for REAL IREF 8 98 us for DINT to REAL wire 12 us for ADD block 0 83 us for REAL to REAL wire 0 83 us for REAL to REAL wire 20 us for DIV block For each function block instruction add the following time Table B 5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions Instruction Time us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx ABS 2 2 ACS 273 251 ADD 12 11 ALM 105 72 AND 1 1 ASN 264 243 ATN 226 214 BAND 9 8 BNOT 10 8 BOR 10 9 BTDT 14 12 BXOR 9 8 COS 224 209 CTUD 29 14 Estimate Execution Time
119. 1 1 AXIS ProgrammedStopMode SSV 130 5 107 7 AXIS Registration Position GSV 39 6 28 9 AXIS Registration Time GSV 37 3 27 8 AXIS Registration2Position GSV 39 3 28 7 AXIS Registration2Time GSV 39 7 28 9 AXIS RotaryAxis GSV 29 2 20 8 AXIS RotaryAxis GSV 29 2 20 8 AXIS RotaryAxis SSV 130 1 107 5 AXIS RotationalPosResolution GSV 36 5 26 4 AXIS SercosErrorCode GSV 36 3 26 0 AXIS ServoFaultBits GSV 38 4 27 8 AXIS ServoLoopConfiguration GSV 36 7 26 4 AXIS ServoLoopConfiguration SSV 108 8 94 1 AXIS ServoOutputLevel GSV 39 1 28 3 AXIS ServoPolarityBits GSV 37 8 27 3 AXIS ServoPolarityBits SSV 130 5 107 6 AXIS ServoStatusBits GSV 38 4 27 8 AXIS SoftOvertravelFaultAction GSV 28 9 20 1 AXIS SoftOvertravelFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 3 AXIS StartActualPosition GSV 39 6 28 8 AXIS StartCommandPosition GSV 39 1 28 6 AXIS StartMasterOffset GSV 40 6 29 3 AXIS StoppingTimeLimit GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS StoppingTimeLimit SSV 128 7 106 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 16 Estimate Execution Time Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS Stopping Torque GSV 36 0 25 9 AXIS Stopping Torque SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS StrobeActualPosition GSV 39 6 28 9 AXIS StrobeCommandPosition GSV 40 7 29 3 AXIS StrobeMas
120. 11 16 Step 8 Access ControlLogix 11 16 Route PLC 59 Messages Between ControlNet Networks Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Monitor Connections Table of Contents Chapter 12 When to Use This 12 1 Route a ControlNet Message 12 2 Chapter 13 When to Use This 13 1 How to Use This 13 2 Add the Local 1756 CNB 13 2 Add the PanelView 13 5 Organize Your Scheduled 13 8 Organize Your Unscheduled 13 10 Configure the PanelView Terminal 13 12 Create PanelView 13 14 Schedule the ControlNet Network 13 16 Validate 13 17 Chapter 14 When to Use This 14 1 How to Use This 14 1 Configure a ControlNet 14 2 Select a Communication 14 3 Create a Polled 14 4 Create a Polled Node chp viet by ace dr 14 6 14 7 Great
121. 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 12 Estimate Execution Time Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS DriveFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 4 AXIS DriveFaultBits GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS DriveModelTimeConstant GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS DriveModelTimeConstant SSV 130 4 107 5 AXIS DrivePolarity GSV 36 6 26 4 AXIS DrivePolarity SSV 129 3 106 5 AXIS DriveScalingBits GSV 36 6 26 4 AXIS DriveStatusBits GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS DriveThermalFaultAction GSV 25 6 18 1 AXIS DriveThermalFaultAction SSV 127 9 105 4 AXIS DriveWarningBits GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS ExternalDriveType GSV 37 8 27 4 AXIS FaultConfigurationBits GSV 38 4 27 7 AXIS FaultConfigurationBits SSV 130 5 07 5 AXIS FeedbackFaultAction GSV 28 2 19 7 AXIS FeedbackFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 3 AXIS FeedbackNoiseFaultAction GSV 28 5 19 8 AXIS FeedbackNoiseFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 3 AXIS FrictionCompensation GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS FrictionCompensation SSV 130 0 107 0 AXIS Grouplnstance GSV 28 0 20 7 AXIS HardOvertravelFaultAction GSV 28 6 19 9 AXIS HardOvertravelFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 3 AXIS HomeConfigurationBits GSV 41 0 29 6 AXIS HomeConfigurationBits SSV 130 9 108 2 AXIS HomeDirection GSV 28 6 20 6 AXIS HomebDirection SSV 130 2 107 6 AXIS HomeMode GSV 27 9 20 2 AXIS HomeMode SSV 130 2 107 6 AXIS HomeO
122. 2 30 9 MOTIONGROUP Minimumlnterval GSV 34 2 27 7 MOTIONGROUP StartTime GSV 34 2 27 7 MOTIONGROUP TaskLastScanTime GSV 28 0 22 5 MOTIONGROUP TaskMaximumScanTime GSV 28 0 22 5 MOTIONGROUP TaskMaximumScanTime SSV 17 3 22 6 MOTIONGROUP Watchdog GSV 28 0 22 5 MOTIONGROUP Watchdog SSV 17 3 22 7 PROGRAM DisableFlag GSV 16 4 13 5 PROGRAM DisableFlag SSV 34 5 35 5 PROGRAM Instance GSV 18 8 15 6 PROGRAM LastScanTime GSV 25 9 21 7 PROGRAM LastScanTime SSV 16 2 21 9 PROGRAM MajorFaultRecord GSV 70 8 60 1 PROGRAM MajorFaultRecord SSV 47 3 47 6 PROGRAM GSV 25 9 21 7 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 21 Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX PROGRAM SSV 16 2 21 9 PROGRAM MinorFaultRecord GSV 70 8 60 1 PROGRAM MinorFaultRecord SSV 47 3 47 6 PROGRAM SFCRestart GSV 17 0 14 1 PROGRAM SFCRestart SSV 30 5 32 1 REDUNDANCY MaxDatatTransferSize GSV n a 21 6 ROUTINE Instance GSV 17 8 15 7 SERIALPORT BaudRate GSV 24 9 20 3 SERIALPORT DataBits GSV 15 0 11 9 SERIALPORT Parity GSV 15 0 11 9 SERIALPORT PendingBaudRate SSV 103 6 90 0 SERIALPORT PendingDataBits SSV 103 6 90 0 SERIALPORT PendingParity SSV 20 3 90 0 SERIALPORT PendingRTSOffDela
123. 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over EtherNet IP Network 4 3 Add the local 1756 ENBx or 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline ENET module 5 5 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks MainT ask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types Ca User Defined H E Predefined i Module Defined 3 140 Configuration a 42316 m B E 2 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then Yes Go to Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module No Right click O Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 4 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 Name Address Host Name Description Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt 5 Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 6 4 name for module 5 or select the slot number where module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type catalog number e vendor e
124. 21 2 FAULTLOG MajorFaultBits GSV 25 8 21 2 FAULTLOG MajorFaultBits SSV 5 9 21 6 FAULTLOG MinorEvents GSV 24 1 19 7 FAULTLOG MinorEvents SSV 15 2 21 2 FAULTLOG MinorFaultBits GSV 25 8 21 2 FAULTLOG MinorFaultBits SSV 15 9 21 6 MESSAGE ConnectionPath GSV 54 4 41 2 MESSAGE ConnectionPath SSV 19 2 24 8 MESSAGE ConnectionRate GSV 25 7 21 0 MESSAGE ConnectionRate SSV 14 6 20 7 MESSAGE Message lype GSV 15 7 12 5 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 Estimate Execution Time Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX MESSAGE Message lype SSV 66 2 57 6 MESSAGE Port GSV 15 7 12 5 MESSAGE Port SSV 27 7 30 0 MESSAGE TimeoutMultiplier GSV 15 7 12 5 MESSAGE TimeoutMultiplier SSV 13 3 19 7 MESSAGE UnconnectedTimeout GSV 25 7 20 9 MESSAGE UnconnectedTimeout SSV 14 6 20 7 MODULE EntryStatus GSV 23 8 20 0 MODULE FaultCode GSV 23 8 20 1 MODULE Faultlnfo GSV 25 5 21 5 MODULE ForceStatus GSV 17 7 14 8 MODULE Instance GSV 18 4 15 5 MODULE LEDStatus GSV 17 2 144 MODULE Mode GSV 247 20 7 MODULE Mode SSV 14 2 20 4 MOTIONGROUP AutoTagUpdate GSV 75 13 7 MOTIONGROUP AutoTagUpdate SSV 16 0 21 6 MOTIONGROUP Instance GSV 27 2 19 8 MOTIONGROUP Maximumlnterval GSV 34 2 27 7 MOTIONGROUP Maximumlnterval SSV 27
125. 2423 8 Type the name of the domain of the module 9 Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain 10 Choose Set A dialog box asks you to confirm your changes 11 To apply your changes choose OK 12 To close the Module Properties dialog box choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 12 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Check the Module To make sure that this procedure was successful look at the front of the module For this module Check this indicator For this indication 1756 ENET OK LED solid green 1756 ENBx four character display IP address of the module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 13 Configure a Module Using To configure a module using RSLinx software RSLinx Software Configure the Port Check the Module Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module e Connect the Hardware 2 Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure To set up communication between your computer and a controller see Connect Directly to a lle Controller on page 1 24 3 Turn on the power to the module Configure the Port 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of the following Double click the network e Select the network and press the key e Cli
126. 51 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finisb Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 6 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module Description D Comm Format Rack Optimization 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local ENB ENET A Right click 7ocal ENB ENET and select New Module B Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK C M Name BEEN Address Host Name C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt E Slot 0 Chassis Size 10 E Revision 1 fi E Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42580 for the module Use name that identifies the I O in the chassis Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Hack Optimization No None Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 7 Address Host Name Name Description x C Address Host Name Unspecified 0 Comm Format Rack Optimization v Slot fo 4 Chassis Size o J Revision a fi a Electronic Keying Compatible Module _
127. 56 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS TuneSpeedScaling GSV 38 4 27 8 AXIS TuneStatus GSV 36 2 26 3 AXIS TuningConfigurationBits GSV 38 5 27 6 AXIS TuningConfigurationBits SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS TuningSpeed GSV 38 5 27 6 AXIS TuningSpeed SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS TuningTorque GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS TuningTorque SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS TuningTravelLimit GSV 38 5 277 AXIS TuningTravelLimit SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS VelocityCommand GSV 39 8 28 7 AXIS VelocityDataScaling GSV 35 3 25 3 AXIS VelocityDataScalingExp GSV 35 7 25 5 AXIS VelocityDataScalingFactor GSV 36 7 26 4 AXIS VelocityDroop GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityDroop SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS VelocityError GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS VelocityFeedback GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS VelocityFeedforwardGain GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS VelocityFeedforwardGain SSV 130 5 107 5 AXIS VelocityIntegralGain GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS VelocityIntegralGain SSV 130 5 107 6 AXIS VelocitylntegratorError GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS VelocityLimitBipolar GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityLimitBipolar SSV 128 7 106 0 AXIS VelocityLimitNegative GSV 36 0 25 9 AXIS VelocityLimitNegative SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS VelocityLimitPositive GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityLimitPositive SSV 28 7 106 1 AXIS VelocityOffset GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS VelocityOffset SSV 29 9 107 0 AXIS VelocityPolarity GSV 36 2 25 8 AXIS VelocityProportionalGain GSV 33 9 27 7 AXIS VelocityProportionalGain SSV 130 4 107 6 AXIS VelocityScaling GSV 37 8 27 3 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 18 Estimate Execution Time Table
128. 6 CNB Module A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 51 9 Tasks 25m MainTask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types User Defined pun Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration m B E B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D Name Slot 0 E Description a Revision in Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F 42377 D Type a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 17 H Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No
129. 6K a 7 Revision 2 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module lt 8 42440 4 Type a name for the module i e name_of_DHRIO 5 Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 6 For the channel that is connected to the remote I O network select RIO 7 Select the baud rate of the network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 4 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 8 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 9 Click Next 10 Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms Ti Inhibit Module 12 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 10 Type the rate at which the module must communicate with the controller 11 Initially do you want to prevent the module from communicating with the controller If Then Yes Select the check box No Leave the check box cleared unchecked EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 5 12 If com
130. 71 ACN module that is in the chassis with the block transfer module C Choose OK Although your logic will control the path the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial selection RIO or ControlNet ControlNet Slot slot number of the BT module Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value 0 15 4 How many devices require block transfer instructions If Then 16 or less devices Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked more than 16 devices A Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates Is this message to one of those devices If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 12 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules Input data from the first BT module Input data from the next BT module Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order D Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001
131. 9 Disable BOOTP Each time you turn on the module what do you want it to do If you want the module to Then Notes Use the same configuration Go to step 1 This disables BOOTP for the module It no longer requests a configuration from BOOTP servers Request a configuration from a BOOTP Go to Save the e This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module When you turn off server Relation List on the module it loses its configuration information page 1 19 Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module m Relation List New Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Delete 00 00 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Enable 1 NE Disable did Renew 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Disable Status The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module Disable BOOTP Command Successful 42892 Save the Relation List The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re configure the module in the future 1 From the File menu choose Save Relation List 2 Type or select a file name 3 Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 20 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Renew the IP Address of a 1o renew reset the IP address of a 1794
132. 9 AXIS MemoryUse GSV 22 9 17 4 AXIS MemoryUse GSV 22 9 17 4 AXIS ModuleChannel GSV 28 2 20 4 AXIS ModuleClassCode GSV 41 4 29 8 AXIS ModuleFaultBits GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS MotionStatusBits GSV 40 0 29 1 AXIS MotorCapacity GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS MotorData GSV 563 9 355 6 AXIS MotorElectricalAngle GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS MotorFeedbackConfiguration GSV 35 6 25 5 AXIS MotorFeedbackResolution GSV 36 6 26 4 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 Estimate Execution Time Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 11 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS MotorFeedbackType GSV 35 9 25 6 AXIS MotorlD GSV 36 6 26 4 AXIS MotorThermalFaultAction GSV 25 9 18 3 AXIS MotorThermalFaultAction SSV 128 0 105 3 AXIS NegativeDynamicTorqueLimit GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS OutputCamExecutionTargets GSV 39 1 28 6 AXIS OutputCamLockStatus GSV 39 6 28 9 AXIS OutputCamPendingStatus GSV 38 1 28 1 AXIS OutputCamStatus GSV 39 7 28 9 AXIS OutputCamTransitionStatus GSV 39 6 28 8 AXIS OutputLimit GSV 37 3 21 0 AXIS OutputLimit SSV 29 9 107 0 AXIS OutputLPFilterBandwidth GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS OutputLPFilterBandwidth SSV 30 4 107 6 AXIS OutputNotchFilterFrequency GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS OutputNotchFilterFrequency SSV 28 7 106 1 AXIS OutputOffset GSV 37 0 26 9 AXIS OutputOffset SSV 129 9 107 0 AXI
133. AENx module 1794 AENx Module Install BOOTPServer Software e Set Up the Hardware Enter the New Configuration e Send the Configuration Disable BOOTP e Save the Relation List Install BOOTPServer Software To renew the IP address of a 1794 AENx module use BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation You can find the software at either of these locations RSLogix 5000 software CD ENU N TOOLS BootP Utility folder BootPServer exe www ab com networks Set Up the Hardware 1 Cycle the power to the module 00 00 BC 06 00 6A 31247a Ethernet Adapter 2 Write down the Ethernet address of the module 3 Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 21 Enter the New Configuration 1 Start the BOOTPServer software m Relation List 2 gt New Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 00 00 BC 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Delete Enable Disable Renew ddd 42860 2 Choose New Ethemet Address 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 4 SubmetMask 0 O O0 Q0 5 Gateway 0 0 0 0 4 6 Cancel 3 Type the Ethernet address of the module e g 00 00 BC 06 00 6A 42891 4 Type the IP address for the module 5 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 6 Type the g
134. Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no Go to the next step yes output module Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the 1 0 configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration x 1756 CNB x name of local CNB z1794 ACN x name of rail 1794 1 0 module here B Right click the 1794 ACN module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _p Name Slet E 4 Description El F Comm Format y Revision gl 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 00 D name for module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 7 F Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format
135. Allen Bradley ControlLogix System 1756 L1 L1Mx L55Mxx L63 User Manual 1 ip ii E Automation 1101 Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of these products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards In no event will Allen Bradley be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resulting from the use or application of these products Any illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of
136. B amp Node 110 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts a Activity Log Setup I Scan Class Tag Database Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 Double click Node C DDE Server D Name v Enabled Server Name El q4 E 42430 Data Source Direct Driver C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click 8 F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G Click Accept H Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 7 Import Logix5000 Tags To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility Create an L5K File e Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility Use the Utility to Create a CSV File Import the CSV File Create an L5K File A Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access B From the File menu choose Save As CINES x Save in Projects P ek E3 Samples File name I Save as type RSLogis 5000 Import Export File L5K Cancel Help L 43070 C Select RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K D Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 8 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility A Get your RSLogix 500
137. B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS VelocityScaling SSV 130 5 107 6 AXIS VelocityServoBandwidth GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS VelocityServoBandwidth SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS VelocityStandstill Window GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityStandstill Window SSV 28 7 106 AXIS VelocityThreshold GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityThreshold SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS VelocityWindow GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS VelocityWindow SSV 128 7 106 AXIS WatchPosition GSV 39 6 28 9 CONTROLLER DataTablePadPercentage GSV n a 19 8 CONTROLLER KeepTestEditsOnSwitchOver GSV n a 12 8 CONTROLLER RedundancyEnabled GSV n a 12 9 CONTROLLER TimeSlice GSV 24 3 19 8 CONTROLLER TimeSlice SSV 50 2 43 0 CONTROLLERDEVICE DeviceName GSV 55 6 48 6 CONTROLLERDEVICE ProductCode GSV 22 8 19 2 CONTROLLERDEVICE ProductRev GSV 22 8 19 2 CONTROLLERDEVICE SerialNumber GSV 24 6 20 7 CONTROLLERDEVICE Status GSV 22 8 19 2 CONTROLLERDEVICE Type GSV 22 8 19 2 CONTROLLERDEVICE Vendor GSV 22 8 19 2 CST CurrentStatus GSV 21 8 20 1 CST CurrentValue GSV 36 8 32 2 DF1 ACKTimeout GSV 24 8 22 0 DF1 DiagnosticCounters GSV 65 2 53 7 DF1 DuplicateDetection GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 EmbeddedResponseEnable GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 ENOTransmitLimit GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 EOTSuppression GSV 14 8 13 5 DF1 ErrorDetection GSV 14 8
138. BL 12 LEO 20 36 LES 20 36 LFL 64 64 LFU 64 64 LIM 52 44 LN 140 48 LOG 140 48 LOWER 88 MAAT 56 MAFR 56 MAG 216 172 MAH 56 MAHD 72 MAJ 256 116 MAM 308 124 MAOC 480 MAPC 168 MAR 192 96 MAS 136 84 MASD 56 MASR 56 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 6 Estimate Memory Use Table C 3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Memory for DINT bytes Memory for REAL bytes MNC mo ER MAW 124 72 180 MCD 236 96 MCR 4 MDF 56 MDO 124 72 MDOC 120 MOR 64 MDW 56 MEQ 32 MGPS 60 MGS 60 MGSD 52 MGSP 52 MGSR 52 MID 108 MOD 44 44 MOV 24 48 MRAT 56 MRHD 64 MRP 124 72 MSF 56 MSG 36 MSO 56 MUL 44 44 MVM 44 NEG 28 56 NEQ 20 20 NOP 4 NOT 28 ONS 36 OR 28 OSF m OSR m OTE 4 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Memory Use C 7 Table C 3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Memory for DINT bytes Memory for REAL bytes OTL 4 OTU 4 PID 228 92 RAD 144 52 RES 8 RET 40 RTO 8 RTOS 72 SBR 40 SIN 140 48 SIZE 124 SOR EOR empty rung 16 501 48 SQL 48 500 44 SOR 40 40 SRT 108 108 SSV 84 84 STD 104 STOD 72 STOR 72 SUB 28 44 SWPB 72 TAN 140 48 TND 12 TOD 40 TOF 8 TON 8
139. BT W_cfo BTW_index Slot Dest BTW Path 0 Length 1 Dest BTW Slot De MSG Type Block Transfer Write Message Control 43023 10 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 21 BTW DN ADD Add Source 1 Source B BTW index ne Dest BTw index 0e 43023 Qu LR Equal Source BTw index Dest BTW index Source B BT output modules pe 43023 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 22 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Address 1 0 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic For step by step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PMO01 the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags Use the following table to select the address of an I O device If the device is Then use this address digital name type Data group bit analog element of the array that stores the data for or from this device Where Is name name of the remote 1 0 adapter such as the 1771 ACN module e Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired Use the name from the 1 0 configuration of the controller type type of devic
140. ControlNet network This procedure uses RSLogix 5 software revision 3 x A Using RSLogix 5 software open the project for the PLC 5 controller that sends the message B Display the set up screen for the message C Specify the following parameters For this section And this item Specify This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in this PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message MultiHop Yes D Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address This PLCS 1756 CNB Node dec lt a E ControlLogix Backplane v 1756 Backplane Slot dec lt 42426 E Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is on the same ControlNet network as the controller that sends the message F Type the slot number of the 1756 CNB module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Route 1 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks 12 3 G Press the Insert key To Address Type To Address This PLCS 1756 CNB Node o a aR 1756 Backplane Slot dec 1756 CNB ControlNet Node dec 42464 H Select 7756 CNB I Type the ControlNet node number of the controller that receives the message The following example depicts the MultiHop entries
141. Cycle Time of 1 4 1 5 8 2 Select the intensity of the light beam on the fiber optic cable For cables that span long distances or cables that are low quality select High Choose Finish Program Motion Control 24 7 1756 M08SE Add the SERCOS Drive Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types 1 0 Configuration X 1756 MOBSE 4 L Right click and select New Module 2 Select the SERCOS drive and choose OK 3 Name fi E 4 4 Description zl Revision Electronic Keying Compatible Module m 5 43018 3 Type a name for the drive Type or select the node number of the drive If this is a multi axis drive select the node number of the first axis 5 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 6 Choose Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 8 Program Motion Control 8 Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 ecc rrca E Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 If communication with the module fails how do you want the 8 11 10 11 12 13 controller to respond ATTENTION If communic
142. EN P November 2001 4 6 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Address Host Name Name Description Comm Format Rack Optimization Chassis Size 8 Revision l E Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C IP Address 4 1 Host Name lt Unspecitied gt Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42816 6 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 Click Next Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over EtherNet IP Network 4 7 9 Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms 10 Inhibit Module 1i Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 In step 4 which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update None No RPI is required Go to the next step 10 Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select th
143. Float Data wiring_mode floating point mode does not provide sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp Integer Data wiring_mode isolated or temperature measuring analog input 25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data sample time must be less than 25 ms time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data analog output associated inputs are REALs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Float Data omit the time stamp Float Data associated inputs are INTs time stamp the data echo CST Timestamped Integer Data omit the time stamp Integer Data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 8 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Name Slot 4 Description gt Comm Format Revision 1 nd Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42420 G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms J Inhibit Module K Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 I
144. ION 4 Store batteries in cool dry environment We recommend 25 C with 40 to 60 relative humidity You may store batteries for up to 30 days between 45 to 85 C such as during transportation To avoid possible leakage do not store batteries above 60 C for more than 30 days Because the controller uses a lithium battery you must follow specific precautions when handling or disposing a battery ATTENTION The controller uses a lithium battery which contains potentially dangerous chemicals Before handling or disposing a battery review Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 A Turn on the chassis power B Does the existing battery show signs of leakage or damage If Then Yes Before handling the battery review Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 No Go the next step C Remove the old battery top no connection 4 middle black lead bottom red lead 30167 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery 25 5 D Install a new 1756 BA1 battery ATTENTION Only install a 1756 BA1 battery If you install a different battery you may damage the controller E On the front of the controller is the BAT LED off If Then Yes Go the next step No 1 Check that the battery is correctly connected to the controller 2 If the BAT LED remains on install another 1756 BA1 battery 3 If the BAT LED
145. In step F did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT e For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 9 J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 10 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points or channels devices As a
146. Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the RSView project fal control KH Zu fal control DN CRES gt message EN FAL File Arith Logical Control Length Position Mode Dest Expression fal_control 0 all int buffer fal control pos dint array fal control pos MSG NE 21 C q e Where dint_array Type Unconfigured Message Control message Is an CDN gt CDN gt CER gt 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 20 Configure the Message Table 14 1 Message to a RSView project If the data is And you want to integer s read receive data A Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network In the MSG instruction click H For this item Message Type On the Configuration tab specify the following parameters Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as N7
147. M001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline ENET Module 5 5 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 1 9 Tasks MainT ask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types Ca User Defined H E Predefined i Module Defined 3 140 Configuration a 42316 B E 2 Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then Yes Go to Add the PanelView Terminal No Right click O Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 4 Communicate with PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 4 Name Address Host Name Description Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt 5 Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 6 4 name for module 5 or select the slot number where module is installed 6 How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Matc
148. MPLE Organize unscheduled i e not time critical data Copies the value of bit 3 of station_1_status DINT tag to station_1 start a member of the station_1 structure station_1_status 3 station_1 start TE P EN J E Copies the value of counter DN to bit 1 of station_1_status DINT tag counter DN station 1 status 1 lE ED J E RUN mode is an alias for bit 4 of station_1_status DINT tag RUN mode station 1 _Status 4 gt Moves pu_write_1 an integer that the PanelView writes to shift_entry DINT tag and moves shift display DINT tag to pu_read_i an integer that the PanelView reads MOV MOV Move Move Source pv write 1 Source shift display 0 0 0 Dest shift entry Dest pv read 1 0 0 0 42403 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 12 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Configure the PanelView A Start PanelBuilder32 software Terminal B Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application C From the Application menu select Settings D Click the Comms Setup button Terminal name_of_terminal Node Address InterScan Delay E E ka 100 T ms 42395 E Type the ConrolNet node number of the PanelView terminal F Under Node Name right click End of Node List and select Insert Node NEIWOrK INOGES of Node List 42396 G Sel
149. NetWorx for DeviceNet software complete these actions Assign a node address to each device Configure each device Add the devices to the scan list of the 1756 DNB module How to Use This Procedure complete this procedure do the following steps e Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB Module e Step 2 Create Aliases Step 3 Set the Scanner to Run Mode Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project Module 1 0 Configuration g Adda local 1756 DNB module here x 1756 CNB x name of local CNB z x 1756 CNB x name of remote CNB lt q Addaremote 1756 DNB module here B Where is the 1756 DNB module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click O Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote 1756 CNB module and select New Module C Select 7756 DNB and click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 16 2 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device D Slot H 4 Description Input Size 4 E Output Size 4 4 Status Size 32 Revision pu fi i Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42469 D Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O of the network E Type or select the slot number of the module F Type or select the number of input words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1 Fo
150. Network 11 17 D Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address This PLCS 1756 CNB Node dec i ControlLogix Backplane s 1756 Backplane Slot dec lt a 42426 E Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller F Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 18 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 12 Route PLC 59 Messages Between ControlNet Networks You can use ControlLogix communication modules to route a message between PLC 5 controllers that are on different networks i e a remote message The following example depicts a ControlLogix chassis with two 1756 CNB modules that route a message from a ControlNet network to a different ControlNet network EXAMPLE Message from PLC 5C on ControlNet network to a PLC 5C on a different ControlNet network CIC NIN BIB ControlNet node 3 node 5 network A ControlNet network B node 2 node 1 Message 5 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 12 2 Route 5 Messages Between ControlNet Networks Route a ControlNet To send a message from a PLC 5C controller to a PLC 5C controller on Message a different
151. OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes RUNS CO CO ON From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 14 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 2 Gesrablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration
152. OS module and RSLogix 5000 software create an integrated motion control system 1756 M02AE Servo Module Drive Position Velocity Motor 4 Feedback Drive Position Velocity Mot RSLogix5000 Software ControlLogix Controller O Integrated Program Execution Axis Motion Configuration Programming Motion Trajectory Planner Position Velocity 1756 MO8SE SERCOS Module SERCOS Drive Position Velocity The ControlLogix controller contains a high speed motion task which executes motion requests from the routines and generates position and velocity profile information Each ControlLogix controller controls up to 16 1756 MO2AE or 1756 MO8SE modules The 1756 2 servo module connects to a servo drive and closes a high speed position and velocity loop Each 1756 MO2AE module controls up to two axes The 1756 MO8SE SERCOS module connects to one or more SERCOS drives and controls up to 8 axes Each SERCOS drive closes a high speed position and velocity loop RSLogix 5000 software provides complete axis configuration and motion programming support Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 2 Program Motion Control How to Use This Procedure To program motion control Select a CST Master Device Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Select a CST Master Device Add the Motion Module e 1756 MO8SE
153. Optimization Comm Format address the required point as described in step F Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 2 1 1 C conveyor l Data 2 1 C startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is A in slot 2 of a rail named conveyor Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format a structure associated with the ACN module actually transfers the data However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the ACN structure start lt conveyor Data 2 1 gt Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42435 LII FT Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over ControlNet Network 10 13 Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network If No CO CO ON Then RUN B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Add
154. Over a ControlNet Network Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms Inhibit Module J MajorFaul On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 H Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc I Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box J If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating K Click Finisb Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Read or Write Data To From a Block Transfer Module Block Transfer Read Block Transfer Write Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 7 Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module
155. P November 2001 17 8 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Configure a 1756 DHRIO Determine if you must complete this task Channel If a Sends a message toa Overa And there is Then PLC 5 controller ControlLogix controller local network only one ControlLogix Complete this task SLC 500 controller controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix Go to Access ControlLogix Data controller in the chassis on page 17 20 remote network p Goto Access ControlLogix Data on page 17 20 ControlLogix gt gt p Goto Add a 1756 DHRIO controller Module on page 17 11 In the following example a 1756 DHRIO module automatically sends messages to a controller EXAMPLE Route local message The 1756 DHRIO module automatically routes any local messages that it receives over Channel A to the controller that is in slot 2 DICIS HINIS RIBIS channel A 0 DH node 2 DH network Local Message 5 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 9 A Install the 1756 DHRIO module B Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation For example perform one of the following Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module Connect the chassis to an EtherNet IP or ControlNet
156. P Network How to Use This Procedure IMPORTANT If the all the I O modules are in the same chassis as the controller no remote I O go to Add I O Modules on page 3 8 If you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary tasks e Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module e Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks e Add I O Modules Create Aliases e Validate Connections Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 3 Add the Local 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline ENET Module 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks MainTask 5 29 MainProgram 2 Program Tags MainFoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends Data Types Ca User Defined 9 0 Predefined Module Defined 9 1 0 Configuration 42316 o B Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module no Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 4 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network D 9 Name prol Address Host Na
157. PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller over EtherNet IP Network 5 17 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix Write integers to a PLC 5 controller controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int b
158. Producea Tag A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller that produces sends the data B From the Logic menu select Edit Tags IMPORTANT To produce a tag the tag must meet be controller scope one of these data types DINT REAL array of DINTs or REALs user defined less than or equal to 500 bytes If the tag does not meet these requirements reorganize the tag C From Scope select name of controller controller Only tags that are controller scope can produce data D Select the tag that will produce the data and press the ALT Enter keys Name Description Tag Type C Base Alias id m consumers 8 2 Consunied Data Type Scope name of controller controller Y 42352 E Select the Produced option button F Type or select the number of controllers that will consume receive the tag G Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 4 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Local 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller that ENET Module consumes receives the data E amp Controller name of controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 21 9 Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types i User Defined i Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration
159. S placeholder GSV 0 0 0 0 AXIS PositionCommand GSV 39 9 28 6 AXIS PositionDataScaling GSV 36 5 25 9 AXIS PositionDataScalingExp GSV 34 4 24 9 AXIS PositionDataScalingFactor GSV 36 7 26 4 AXIS PositionError GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS PositionErrorFaultAction GSV 27 5 19 4 AXIS PositionErrorFaultAction SSV 129 4 106 4 AXIS PositionErrorTolerance GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS PositionErrorTolerance SSV 129 9 107 0 AXIS PositionFeedback GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS PositionIntegralGain GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS PositionIntegralGain SSV 130 4 107 6 AXIS PositionIntegratorError GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS PositionLockTolerance GSV 38 1 27 3 AXIS PositionLockTolerance SSV 129 9 107 0 AXIS PositionPolarity GSV 36 2 25 7 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 15 Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS PositionProportionalGain GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS PositionProportionalGain SSV 130 5 107 5 AXIS PositionServoBandwidth GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS PositionServoBandwidth SSV 130 5 107 4 AXIS PositionUnwind GSV 39 4 28 7 AXIS PositionUnwind SSV 130 6 108 0 AXIS PositiveDynamicTorqueLimit GSV 37 2 26 8 AXIS PowerCapacity GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS PowerSupplylD GSV 36 2 25 6 AXIS PrimaryOperationMode GSV 35 1 25 2 AXIS ProgrammedStopMode GSV 29 9 2
160. Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 15 H Click the Data Collection tab I Specify the following parameters For this item Do this Processor Type Select PLC 5 Data Collection Mode 1 Clear the Polled Messages check box 2 Select the Unsolicited Messages check box J Click the Advanced Communication tab K Specify the following parameters For this item Type or select Communication Driver driver for the network across which you will send the message Station slot number of the controllerthat is sending the message Local or Remote Addressing Remote L In the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box specify the following parameters For this parameter Type or select Bridge Device 1785 KA5 Bridge 5130 KA Local ID Virtual Link ID from Step D Local KA5 arbitrary number between 1 and 107 RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does notuse the entry Remote ID number that designates the backplane of the ControlLogix chassis Use a different number for each backplane M Click OK N Click Done and confirm the update of the topic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 16 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Add the 1756 ENBx or ENET Module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 A Open the RSLogix 5000
161. V Source BTR cfa BTR index LEN Source BTR cfa BTR index Slot 0 0 Dest BTR REG_LEN Dest BTR Slot 0e 0e co MSG Copy File Type Block Transfer Read Source BTA_cfg BTR_indes Path Message Control BTR Dest BTR Path Lenath 1 43020 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope BTR block transfer message that reads data from MESSAGE name of controller each BT module controller BTR_cfg array of configuration properties for each BT BT_CONFIGURATION name_of_controller module number controller BTR_index controls which BT module that the MSG DINT name_of_controller instruction reads controller Where Is the number number of modules that this message reads Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 16 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over ControlNet Network co Copy File Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Path Dest BTR Path Length 1 On this tab For this item Configuration Message Type 2 Configure the message MSG Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR m Type or select Block Transfer Head Number Of Elements 1 Although your logic will control this value the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value Destination Tag BTR int buffer read To create this tag A Click New Tag B Type the name C In the Data type box type INTL length where length equals the length variable of the B7_input tag from page 9 14
162. View Project over an EtherNet IP Network Node Local topic 1 topic 2 controller scope tags Offline arrays and structures at array 1 the controller scope counter 1 program w Program MainProgram scope tags Online bool 1 dint 1 real 1 single elementtags BOOLs DINTs REALs etc L On the right double click the tag that contains the required data i e the address for the RSView tag M Click Accept If this is an RSView32 project go to Validate an RSView32 Tag Create a Unsolicited Topic A Display RSLinx software B From the Communications menu select Configure Client Applications C Click the Virtual Link ID tab D Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations If Then Yes 1 Record the Virtual Link ID number which you will use in subsequent steps Click OK N No N Click OK co D Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation Close the RSLinx software If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service you must also stop the service Re open the RSLinx software E From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration F In the bottom left corner of the window click New G
163. W Click the W Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is available CAII the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is And it Comm Then Format is digital Data e g Input 1 Nextto name slot X click the sign Data Output Data 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M 4 Click the point number of the device Rack Optimization 1 Click name s10ot X 2 To the right of the selection click M 3 Click the point number of the device analog input p 1 Nextto name slot xX click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click Ch z nputData analog output p 1 Next name s1ot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click Ch zOutputData Where Is name name of the 1794 ACN module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 12 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 2 Data 1 C conveyor 2 Data 1 C A startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor Even if the I O module uses the Rack
164. a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off low Click Apply Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 4 Configure Dial Up Communications J Click the System Protocol tab General Serial Port System Protocol maraga ccu T Error Detection Protocol DFI Point to Point eg Station Address 0 Pee v Enable Duplicate Detection M Receive Limit 3 ENG Transmit Limit ACK Timeout 50 x20 ms Embedded Responses Autodetect T Select DF1 Point to Point Default L Select the error detection method that your equipment uses M Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box N Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure Dial Up Communications 23 5 Step 3 Dial the Other Use the following logic to dial another controller Controller When condition turns on the AWA instruction commands the modem to dial a remote controller The GSV instruction monitors the status of the serial port condition AWA GSV lE ASCII Write Append CEN2 4 Get System Value Channel 0 CIP Object Class DF1 Source modem number 0 CDN gt CIP Object Name Attribute Name Dia
165. abase Import Export Wizard xj Select the type of database you want to import or export Import Export Type import Hoview Studio CSV files Import a Import RSView Studio CSV files Database Import Export Wizard Choose the RSView Studio CSV files you want to import Import Files Iv Tags ec EH HR Database Import Export Wizard Choose the import options you want Import Options Tags Skip Existing Fastest your option Update Existing Slower Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 11 4 Database Import Export Wizard RSView project 4 Database Import Export Wizard All correct Correct 43072 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 12 Create a Polled Tag Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network To create RSView tags one tag at a time im YOUR RSVIEw PROJECT RSV Project Explorer Your RSView Project amp Your RSView Project C3 System Project Settings Channel gt Node 1 Scan Class Tag Database Edit Mode WM Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts ms 43081 User Accounts 08 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Tag Name Type Analog Security 7 Des
166. ames see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PMO01 the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags Use the following table to select the address of an I O device If the device is Then use this address digital name type Data group bit analog element of the array that stores the data for or from this device Where Is name name of the remote 1 0 adapter such as the 1771 ASB module e Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired Use the name from the 1 0 configuration of the controller type type of device If Then input output 0 group group number of the module to which this device is wired bit point bit number to which this device is wired Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 27 EXAMPLE Address a digital device that is wired to a 1771 I O module 1 0 nfiguration 5 1756 DHRIO B Local_DHRIO adapter module for rack number 4 B lt 00401 gt 17771 ASB Remote Rack 4 input device group 2 bit 0 Remote Rack 4 l Data 2 0 fe zu des LU LII FT 4243t Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 28 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with
167. annel 0 AND Mask 0 OR Mask 1 cERo SerialPort Control modem hangup 2 Channel Status Decimal 0 Is tag that controls the execution of the message MESSAGE data type 42393 modem hangup 1 tag that controls the execution of the AHL SERIAL PORT CONTROL data type modem hangup 2 tag that controls the execution of the AHL SERIAL PORT CONTROL data type Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 12 Configure Dial Up Communications Step Stagger the As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the Messages execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each g message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 24 Program Motion Control When to Use This The ControlLogix controller 1756 MO2AE servo module or Procedure 1756 MO8SE SERC
168. annel B DH Link Undefined ControlNet ControlNet network ControlNet node 1 link ID 100 node 2 DC DC HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 channel A channel A DH node 2 DH node 3 DH network DH network link ID 20 link ID 40 Routing table for the left 1756 DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756 DHRIO module E Backplane Link 10 El Backplane Link 30 1756 DHAIO Slot 0 Channel A DH Link 40 Channel B DH Link Undefined fj 1756 CNB Slot 1 E CNET Link 100 E 9 1756 CNB Network address 1 Backplane Link 10 2 9 1756 DHAIO Slot 0 Channel 4 DH Link 20 Channel B DH Link Undefined 42190 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42191 Step A For each network and each ControlLogix backplane in your system designate a unique link ID number Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 3 Configure a routing table for each 1756 DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller Detailed actions Here is an example ControlNet network link ID 100 DIC HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane link ID 10 0 DH network link ID 20 D C HIN ControlLogix R B backplane link ID 30 0 DH network link ID 40 B Connect the hardware 1 Install t
169. ark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 BP 3A B 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Rockwell Automation Br hlstraRe 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 351 6723 Fax 65 355 1733 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 PN 957626 25 Supersedes Publication 1756 UM001C EN P June 2001 Copyright 2001 Rockwell Automation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
170. ateway address for the module if you need one 7 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 22 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Send the Configuration m Relation List nee Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Delete 00 00 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Enable 1 Disable Renew 42860 1 In the Relation List select the module 2 Choose Renew Status The software resets the module and sends the new address we Sent 130 130 130 198 to Ethemet address 00 00 BC 03 62 37 42860 Disable BOOTP Each time you turn on the module what do you want it to do If you want the module to Then Notes Use the same configuration Go to step 1 This disables BOOTP for the module It no longer requests configuration from BOOTP servers Request a configuration from a BOOTP Go to Save the e This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module When you turn off server Relation List on the module it loses its configuration information page 1 23 Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 23 Relation List New Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway 00 00 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 130 130 130 50 Delete Enable 1 EN 2
171. ation with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Choose Next 43019 Choose New Axis Type a name for the tag for this node axis and choose OK Select the name of the tag from step 10 If this is a multi axis drive repeat steps 9 11 for each axis Choose Next Create a Motion Group Program Motion Control 24 9 Bus Regulator Catalog Number lt none gt 43024 14 Which type of bus regulator does this drive use If Then select external catalog number of the regulator internal Internal none none 15 Choose Finish Controller Tasks Motion Groups a m 1 Right click and select New Ung Trends rouped Axes name_of_axis Data Types 1 0 Configuration x 1 756 MO8SE Motion Group 2 Type a name for the group and choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 10 Program Motion Control Assign the Properties of the Motion Group Controller Tasks Motion Groups Nam
172. bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Configure Master and Slave Communications 22 13 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs EXAMPLE Read integers from PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all CER gt Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos EXAMPLE Write integers to PLC 5 controller When condition turns on moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller condition fal_control FAL iE CRES 2 File Arith Logical CEND Control fal control Length Position 0 all Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN
173. ble CAII the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is Then digital 1 Nextto name s1ot X click the sign 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M 4 Click the point number of the device analog 1 Nextto name s1ot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click Ch z Data Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the communication module in the chassis such as a 1756 ENBx or 1756 CNB module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 12 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 l Data 1 C A start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor conveyor 1 1 Data 1 C Even if the I O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format address the required point as described in step F Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 l Data 1 C A startis an alias for point 1 of the input module that is
174. blication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 Estimate Execution Time Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx MRAT n a 45 32 MRP n a 89 58 MSF n a 154 102 MSG n a 163 6 119 9 MSO n a 51 35 MUL DINT 9 6 92 MUL REAL 18 0 174 MVM n a 11 6 97 NEG DINT 0 57 0 55 NEG REAL 0 94 0 92 NEO DINT 0 38 0 4 NEO REAL 0 38 0 4 NOP n a 0 05 0 05 NOT DINT 0 51 0 49 ONS BOOL 2 8 2 6 OR DINT 0 57 0 55 OSF BOOL 3 4 2 9 OSR BOOL 3 7 3 1 BOOL 0 2 0 2 OTL BOOL 0 2 0 2 OTU BOOL 0 2 0 2 PID independent 378 6 349 1 slave mode PID independent 356 5 328 0 PID ISA dependent 425 5 394 1 PID manual mode 311 0 284 2 PID set output mode 311 0 284 2 RAD REAL 18 4 17 8 RES TC or R 0 32 0 32 RET in FOR loop n a 46 45 RET parameters n a 4 1 3 9 RTO TIMER 0 43 0 42 RTOS example 1 n a 816 8 473 9 Source 1234 5677 RTOS example 2 n a 1045 611 5 Source 1 234 SBR no parameters 48 46 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Execution Time B 9 Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Data type Tr
175. ce module in the 1 0 configuration of the controller the controller produces a fault code for the module e The GSV instruction gets the fault code for module name and stores it in the module_name_fault tag e If module name fault is not equal to 0 then the controller is not communicating with the module GSV NEQ Get System Value Not Equal CIP Object Class MODULE Source module name fault CIP Object Name module name Attribute Name FaultCode Source B 0 Dest module name fault 42468 Where Is a module name name of the module from the 1 0 configuration module name fault DINT tag that stores the fault code for the module interrupt the execution of logic and execute A In the controller organizer right click the module and select Properties the Controller Fault Handler B Click the Connection tab C Select check the Major Fault If Connection Fails While in Run Mode check box D Develop a routine for the Controller Fault Handler See the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 15 4 Monitor Connections Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 16 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are part of a DeviceNet network Before you use this procedure set up the Procedure DeviceNet network Connect the devices to the network In RS
176. ce Link Remote ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step L Destination Link Virtual Link ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step D Destination Node H Click OK 71 RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 22 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create an Unsolicited Node Open the RSView project ime YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your RSView Project x Edit Mode a Your RSView Project J E System Project Settings Channel Channel Je Node B amp Node 110 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts 5 Activity Log Setup I Scan Class Tag Database ie Tag Monitor 43081 User Accounts 4 B Double click Node Data Source Direct Driver C DDE Server D Name v Enabled Server Name El q4 E 42430 C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click 8 F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G In the Access Path box type the name of the topic from Create a Unsolicited Topic H Click Accept I Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 E Create an Unsolicited Tag Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 23 im YOUR RSVIEw PROJECT RSV Project Explorer Your RSView Project a You
177. ck the sign Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 14 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 Expand a network until you see the module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax a gt 1756 ENB 3 Right click the module and choose Module Configuration 4 Click the Port Configuration tab 5 6 7 8 10 11 42472 5 Clear Cuncheck the Obtain IP Address from Bootp Server check box 6 Type the IP address for the module 7 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 8 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 15 9 Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet IP devices d e When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or ENET module will you use a host name instead of an IP address If Then Yes Go to step 10 No Go to step 12 10 Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain 11 Type the name of the domain of the module 12 Choose OK Check the Module To make sure that this procedure wa
178. control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name of controller controller and click OK e condition X MSG e J Unconfigured I EN e Message Control message ER gt e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible e PLC 5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 15 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from a PLC 5 controller When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix
179. cription Address Host Name Unspecified 7 D Comm Format Rack Optimization E Slot 3a Chassis Size o 4 Revision 1 n a Electronic Keying Compatible Modue v 42580 C Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O in the chassis D Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Hack Optimization No None E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 6 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Address Host Name Name Description IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt Comm Format Rack Optimization Slot 0 E Chassis Size E Revision ma fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42580 How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match type e catalog number e vendor major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying Publication 1756 UM001D EN P
180. cription C ption Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Minimum 0 Scale 1 Units Maximum 100 Offset 0 Data Defaut 4243 C Specify the properties of the tag Data Source Y Type Device C Memory id Address B 42432 Click Device Click Select the name of the node that you created in Create a Polled Node and click OK Click Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet M Network 14 13 Node Local H Click the sign Node Local topic 1 topic 2 I Next to the topic from Create a Polled Topic click the sign tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project 1 M9 tags in the ControlLogix controller amp Node Local topic 1 topic 2 Offline Online J Next to Offline click the sign controller scope tags p F amp F Node Local arrays and structures at the controller scope program p scope tags topic 1 topic 2 Offline array 1 counter 1 Program MainProgram Online K On the left select the entry that contains the required
181. d unchecked using ladder logic Click Finish Address 1 0 If the device Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 4 11 To monitor or control an I O device assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic For step by step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PMO001 e All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope As you assign addresses click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I O tags Use the following table to select the address of an I O device is And it Comm Format is Then use this address digital Data e g Input Data Output name slot type Data bit Data Rack Optimization name slot type bit analog input gt name slot type Ch InputData analog output gt name slot type Chf OutputData Where Is name name of the adapter module on the rail such as an AEN or ACN module slot slot number of the 1 0 module type type of device If Then input output 0 bit point bit number of the device Ch channel that the device is wired to Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 12 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network When you choose rack optimization for an I O module its tags are created as aliases for the tags of the adapter module In your logic you see the tag of the device as aliases for a tag of the adapte
182. d05 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 16 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 9 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1771 I O modules when a e 1756 CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network 1771 ACN adapter connects the 1771 I O modules to the same ControlNet network ControlLogix Chassis with 1771 ACN Adapter 1756 CNB Module OY L ToS TOS pomm E m 42518 ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure TIP To create and manage tags as you program your logic use these tips To create a tag 1 Type the name for the tag 2 Right click the tag and choose New tag name Right click the tag and choose dit tag name Properties Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 2 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network If you have not already done so in a
183. develop the basic code for your application perform isolated tests of your application How to Use this Manual This manual is divided into the basic tasks that you perform while programming a ControlLogix controller Each chapter covers a task The tasks are organized in the sequence that you will typically perform them As you use this manual you will see some terms that are formatted differently from the rest of the text Text that is Identifies For example Means Italic the actual name of an item that you Right click User Defined Right click on the item that is named see on your screen or in an example User Defined courier information that you must supply Right click You must identify the specific program in based on your application a name of program your application Typically it is a name or variable variable that you have defined Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network Table of Contents Chapter 1 When to Use This 1 1 Before You Bele pecu d RR RAE ne E Mies 1 2 RSLogix 5000 5 1 3 SoftWare cia e mer E a E e xp ed 1 4 BOOTP Server 5 1 5 How to Use This 1 6 Configure a Module Using RSLogix 5000 Software 1
184. ds its messages in the polling sequence step R include this controller in the list Enter the addresses in the order that you want them polled Tag Name Value list priority poll list_priority_poll 0 total number of priority stations 4 list_priority_poll 1 leave blank list_priority_poll 2 address of the first station to poll list_priority_poll 3 address of the second station to poll Flist priority poli kel address of the next station to poll 7 In the list_normal_poll tag step B enter the addresses of the normal stations to poll If this controller master sends its messages in the polling sequence step RJ include this controller in the list Enter the addresses in the order that you want them polled Tag Name Value list normal poll RA 115 normal poll 0 total number of normal stations X iist normal poll 1 leave blank X list normal poll 2 address of the first station to poll 115 normal poll 3 address of the second station to poll 115 normal poll address of the next station to poll Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 8 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 4 Configure the Determine if you must complete this step Master Controller for If you are using this polling mode Then Mes
185. dule 1 3 RSLogix 5000 Software RSLogix 5000 software lets you configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module via another module that is in the chassis controller another communication module module to configure P S RSLogix 5000 software i P S HIN ControlLogix N il R BJ B chassis 0 puu 1756 CP3 or 1747 CP3 serial cable Use RSLogix 5000 software to assign P address required subnet mask recommended gateway address optional domain name optional DNS server addresses optional When you configure a module with RSLogix 5000 software you enter an IP address or host name in two locations On this tab You General first screen of the Identify the module on the EtherNet IP network with which Module Properties wizard you want to connect Port Configuration Assign configuration information to the module such as its IP address This information is stored in the module and identifies the module on the EtherNet IP network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 4 Configure EtherNet IP Module RSLinx Software RSLinx software lets you configure a 1756 ENBx or ENET module via another module in the chassis controller another communication module module to configure RSLinx software P S i P S DIC E
186. dure have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary steps Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB Module Step 2 Add the Remote 1756 CNB Module e Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Module To complete this procedure do the following steps Step 4 Add the Other Controller e Step 5 Enter a Message e Step 6 Configure the Message Step 7 Stagger the Messages If a PLC 5 controller sends the message do the following step Step 8 Access ControlLogix Data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 3 Step 1 Add the 1756 CNB A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Module 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 51 9 Tasks 25m MainTask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs Trends Data Types User Defined pun Predefined Cg Module Defined 3 140 Configuration m B E B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of CNB and click OK D Name Slot 0 E Description a Revision in Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 F 42377 D a name for the module name_of_local_cnb E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How cl
187. dure Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following over a serial cable download a project to a controller go online and monitor a controller edit a project while it is running in a controller save online changes to the offline project file upload 42385 How to Use This Procedure Ifyou have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable To complete this procedure do the following steps Step 2 Configure a Serial Driver Step 3 Select a Path Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 21 2 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable 40043 A Obtain a 1756 CP3 serial cable You can also use a 1747 CP3 cable from the SLC product family but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door TIP If you make your own serial cable Limit the length to 15 2m 50 fv gt e Wire the connectors as follows Workstation Controller 1 CD 1 OD 2 RDX 2 RDX 3 TXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 4 DTR COMMON COMMON 6 DSR 6 DSR mE 7 RTS 7 RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9 9 42231 e Attach the shield to both connectors Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Step 2 Configure a Serial Driver 10 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable 21 3
188. e number of elements manipulated in one scan e time for the operators in the expression GEO DINT 0 38 0 4 GEO REAL 0 59 0 6 GRT DINT 0 38 0 4 GRT REAL 0 59 0 6 GSV n a See Table B 3 on page B 10 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 Estimate Execution Time Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx INSERT n a 138 x 1 3 11 0 x 1 0 x number of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B JMP 1 6 1 2 JSR no parameters n a 10 8 10 2 JSR RET SINT 210 x 3 8 202 x 3 7 x of parameters JSR RET INT 209 x 4 2 201 x 4 1 The time is for the JSR RET pair JSR RET DINT 209 x 3 6 20 2 x 3 5 JSR RET REAL 20 9 x 3 6 20 2 x 3 5 JSR SBR SINT 215 3 8 208 x 37 x number of parameters JSR SBR INT 215 x 4 2 20 7 x 4 1 The time is for the JSR SBR pair JSR SBR DINT 21 6 x 3 6 209 x 3 5 JSR SBR REAL 215 x 3 6 20 x 3 5 LBL 0 2 0 20 LEO DINT 0 38 0 4 LEO REAL 0 59 0 6 LES DINT 0 38 0 4 LES REAL 0 59 0 6 LFL SINT 9 8 8 0 LFL INT 10 9 8 8 LFL DINT 10 2 8 3 LFL REAL 10 2 8 3 LFU SINT 12 0 97 LFU INT 134 10 7 LFU DINT 14 3 112 LFU REAL 142 112 LIM DINT 0 81 0 8 LIM REAL 3 55
189. e controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time 1 Initially inhibit all the modules 2 To test a section of the system clear the check boxes for the modules of that section i e uninhibit the modules G If communication fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a modules fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic H Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Consume a Tag Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 11 In RSLogix 5000 software A B From the Zogic menu select Edit Tags From Scope select name_of_controller controller Only tags that are controller scope can consume other tags Select the tag in this controller that will consume the produced tag and press the ALT Enter keys Description x Cancel Help Type Base Alias C Prod Controller
190. e If Then input output 0 group group number of the module to which this device is wired bit point bit number to which this device is wired Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 23 EXAMPLE Address a digital device that is wired to 1771 I O module x 1 0 Configuration 5 1756 CNB D Local_CNB 417771 ACN Remote_1771 input device adapter module for rack number 4 group 2 bit 0 Remote 1771 l Data 2 0 s dE 3E um J E 4 4243E Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 24 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over ControlNet Network Schedule the ControlNet A Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller Network If No CO CO ON Then B Start RSNetworx for ControlNet software C Has this network been scheduled before From the File menu select New From the Network menu select Online Select your ControlNet network and choose OK Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab type or select the following parameters In this box Specify Network Update Time repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that y
191. e int buffer read array that stores the data from the BT module INT length name of controller controller ints to dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 controller controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length dint_inputs array that stores the input data from the module DINT 1ength name of controller for use by the controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Where length Is the controller number of elements to transfer Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 13 Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output which is an array of DINTs Before the controller sends the data to the module the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write This converts them to 16 bit integers INTs Only include the msg_read EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module msg read EN msg_write EN dints to ints FAL J E 4 6 5 gt File Arith Logical Control dints_to_ints Length lt Position 0 Mode ALL Dest int_buffer_write dints_to_ints POS Expression dints_output dints_to_ints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transf
192. e position loop gain velocity loop gain and current limits within your program For more information on the SSV instruction see the following publications Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual publication 1756 RM003 e ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 Handle Motion Faults Two types of motion faults exist Type Description Example Errors Do not impact controller operation A Motion Axis Move e Should be correct to optimize instruction execution time and ensure with a parameter out program accuracy of range Minor Major e Caused by a problem with the The application servo loop exceeded the e Can shutdown the controller if you PositionErrorTolerance do not correct the fault condition value You can configure a fault as either minor or major by using the Axis Wizard Group window Understanding errors Executing a motion instruction within an application program can generate errors The MOTION INSTRUCTION tag has a field that contains the error code For more information about error codes for individual instructions see the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756 007 Understanding minor major faults Several faults can occur that are not caused by motion instructions For example a loss of encoder feedback or an actual position exceeding an overtravel limit will cause faults The motion fa
193. e BT module controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length int buffer write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16 bit integers INT length name_of_controller controller dints_output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module Where length DINT length Is the name_of_controller controller number of elements to transfer 2 Enter the following rung After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs the MSG instruction sends the data in int_buffer_write to the module dints_to_ints DN MSG C J3 L Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Control Type Block Transfer Write msg write ill DN 42463 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 11 Configure the Messages 1 In the MSG instruction click 2 Select a configuration If you want to For this item Type or select read input data Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements number of INTs to read Destination Tag int_buffer_read 0 write configuration or output data Message Type Block Transfer Write Source Tag int_buffer_write 0 Number Of Elements number of INTs to write For this item Path 3 Click the Communication tab Type or select Path to the 1771 ACN module A Click Browse B Select the 17
194. e RSView tag and press the Enter key Tag Name Value State tag name C What does the State column display If Then valid The tag contains a valid value from the controller error There is a communication problem such as the e controller is not available e server is not running If a MSG instruction reads or writes the value you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time When To Use This Procedure Chapter 15 Monitor Connections Use this procedure to alert the system to the loss of communication with a device module in the I O configuration of the controller For example e failure of a module e loss of power to a chassis e failure of a communication module e break in a cable If the controller losses communication with a module Data from that device does not update The logic makes decisions on data that may or may not be correct EXAMPLE Loss of communication Controller B requires data from controller A If communication fails between the controllers then controller B continues to act on the last data that it received from controller A communication failure 41031 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 15 2 Monitor Connections Monitor a Connection If communication with a device in the I O configuration of the controller does not occur for 100 ms the communication times out and the controller produc
195. e a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 7 F Select a Comm Format IMPORTANT If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And And you want to Then select diagnostic digital input Full Diagnostics Input Data non diagnostic digital input local chassis time stamp a change in data CST Timestamped Input Data omit time stamps Input Data remote chassis p Rack Optimization diagnostic digital output p schedule when to apply outputs Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Full Diagnostics Output Data outputs fused digital output p schedule when to apply outputs CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data p not schedule when to apply CST Timestamped Fuse Data outputs Output Data non diagnostic and non fused local chassis schedule when to apply outputs Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Output Data outputs remote chassis p Rack Optimization non isolated analog input floating point mode provides sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp
196. e am DK xe eate mag yn ed 14 7 Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import 14 8 Use the Utility to Create a5 CSV File 14 8 import the 365 Be scel t uS oi 14 10 Create a Polled 14 12 Create a Unsolicited 14 14 Add the 1756 CNB Module 14 16 Entera Message spo ead ee pee ESE Pe EGS ees 14 18 Configure the Message 14 20 Create an Unsolicited 14 22 Create Unsolicited 14 23 Validate RSView32 14 24 Chapter 15 When Use This Procedure 15 1 Monitor a COnnecthon iioii hen th Wee dale oh 15 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table of Contents vi Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Communicate with Another Controller Over a Network Route PLC 5 or SLC 500 Messages From a Network Communicate with Another Controller over a DH 485 Network Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 16 When to Use This 16 1 How to Use This 16 1 Step 1 Add the 1756 DNB Module 16 1 Step 2 Create Aliases 16 4 Step 3 Set the Scanner to Run 16 6 Chapter 17
197. e battery will support the memory of the controller A Determine the temperature C 1 in below the chassis B Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week EXAMPLE Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week If a controller is off 8 hr day during a 5 day work week all day Saturday and Sunday Then the controller is off 52 of the time 1 total hours per week 7 x 24 168 hours 2 total off hours per week 5 days x 8 hr day Saturday Sunday 88 hours 3 percentage off time 88 168 52 C Using Table 25 A Worst case estimates of battery life on page 25 3 determine the estimated worst case battery life before and after the BAT LED turns on D For each year of battery life decrease the time before the BAT LED turns on by the percentage that is shown in the table Do not decrease the time after the BAT LED turns on Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table 25 A Worst case estimates of battery life Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery 25 3 If the BAT LED turns on when you apply power to the controller the battery life may be less then the table below indicates Some of the battery life may have been used up while the controller was off and unable to turn on the BAT LED Controller Temperature Time before BAT LED turns on Time
198. e check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box 11 If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 8 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller 1 Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no Go to the next step yes output module Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the A Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of the module if it loses communication other controller with the other controller B Paste the module into the 1 0 configuration of this controller C Go to the next task stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration x
199. e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And the And the module must Then select digital input Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the of the nput Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Input Data is None digital input output Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the ofthe Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Data is None digital output Comm Format of the 1794 ACN update at the RPI of the Rack Optimization is Rack Optimization 1794 ACN update faster than the ofthe Output Data 1794 ACN Comm Format of the 1794 ACN p Output Data is None analog p gt Data Name Slot E Description Comm Format ba Revision 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42420 G How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 8 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network H Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms J Inhibit Module K Major Fault On Controller
200. e of New Group 4j 1 Right click and select Motion Group Properties Ungrouped Axes name_of_axis Trends Axis Assignment Attribute Tag Unassigned Assigned Add gt lt Remove Bu 2 Select the axis 3 Choose Add gt Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Program Motion Control 24 11 4 Axis Assignment Attribute Tag 5 we Coarse Update Period E ms 6 Auto Tag Update Disabled 43026 4 5 7 Click the Attribute tab Type or select the rate at which you want the controller to update the axes that are assigned to this group For a 1756 MO8SE module set the Coarse Update Period to a multiple of the Cycle Time Do you want to monitor any of the following members of an axis of this group directly via its tag A GSV instruction always lets you access these values regardless of this selection ActualAcceleration ActualPosition ActualVelocity AverageVelocity e CommandaAcceleration e CommandPosition e CommandVelocity MasterOffset If Then select Notes Yes Enabled This increases the motion execution time of the controller Refer to Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action on page B 28 No Disabled Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 12 Program Motion Control Configure the Axis To configure an axis Display the Properties for
201. e time that the RTS signal turns off low J Click Apply K Click the System Protocol tab General Serial Port System Protocol US Hd I Error Detection Protocol Master I a r Station Address o cb eae Enable Duplicate Detection N Transmit ACK Timeout 50 x20 ms Reply Message Wait 5 320 ms Polling Mode Message Based slave can initiate messages 42388 L Select DF1 Master M Select the error detection method that your equipment uses N Do you want to receive duplicate messages If Then Yes Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected No Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box O Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller P Do you want to ignore messages from slave stations If Then select No Message Based slave can initiate messages Yes Message Based slave cannot initiate messages A slave station can only send a message when it receives a message from this controller master Q Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 10 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Step 5 Configure a Slave A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the slave controller Controller 5 65 Controller name of controller Controller T ags 2 Controller Fault Handler 229 Power Up Handler 21 5 Tasks 39 MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs
202. each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 18 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 23 Configure Dial Up Communications When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to send a message to another controller over a public telephone line 42394 How to Use This Procedure you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems To complete this procedure do the following steps Step 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Controller Step 3 Dial the Other Controller Step 4 Send the Message e Step 5 Configure the Message e Step 6 Hang Up e Step 7 Stagger the Messages For additional information see SCADA System Application Guide publication AG 6 5 8 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 2 Configure Dial Up Communications Step 1 Connect and A Connect each controller to the modem using the following Allen Bradl ble Configure the Modems 1784 CAS 25 pin male modem connector The cable has the following wiring controller modem 9 pin female 25 pin male DCD 1 Pp 8 RXD 2 a 3 TXD 3 2 DTR 4 20 COMMON 5 7 DSR 6 q 6 RTS 7 4 CTS 8 lt 5 B C
203. eave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box J If communication with the modules fails how do you want the controller to respond If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic K Click Finish Your controller organizer should look similar to the following 6 1 0 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name of local cnb 2 PanelView name_of_panelview 42402 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 7 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 8 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Organize Your Scheduled Data lf data type And itis of the tag is part of a structure or array To transfer time critical data use the scheduled communications between the controller and the PanelView terminal And the PanelView writes the data Then Copy name of panelview I Data x y to the tag PanelView reads the data Copy the tag to name of panelview O Data x y BOOL PanelView writes the data Convert the tag to an alias for not part of a structure or name of panelview I Data x y array PanelView reads the data Convert the tag to an alias for name of pane
204. ect ControlLogix5000 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 13 NEIWOIK NOOES 7 Nodeneme Node address _Wode type Allen Bradley PLC of Node List H 42396 H Type a name for the ControlLogix controller I Type the path to the ControlLogix controller Use the following format space cnb address 1 controller slot where is cnb address ControlNet node number of the 1756 CNB module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller controller_slot slot number of the ControlLogix controller J Click OK K Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 14 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Create PanelView Tags A On the PanelView screen create the required object B Double click the object C Click the Edit Tag button Tag Name Data Type gt q E Messaging Type Unscheduled Node Name C Scheduled Description Tag Address Tag Initial Value gt 42397 D name for the object E Select a data type that matches the data type of the tag in the ControlLogix controller F In the ControlLogix controller is the data scheduled or unscheduled If Then scheduled Click the Scheduled button unscheduled 1 Click the
205. egular basis 16 51 24 00 00 BC 03 62 37 2 From the Tools menu choose Default Network Settings Default Network Settings x Defaults Subnet Mask 0 0 0 Q0 3 Gateway 0 0 0 0 42890 3 Type the subnet mask for the module if you need one 4 Type the gateway address for the module if you need one 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 18 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Configure the Module BOOTP Server File Tools Help BOOTP Request History hr min sec Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask 16 51 28 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 26 00 00 BC 03 62 37 16 51 24 00 00 03 62 37 4 1 42858 1 Double click the address of the module Ethernet Address MAC 00 00 B C 03 62 37 oe IPAddess 0 0 0 Q0 4 2 2 Type the IP address for the module 3 Choose OK 15 46 24 DD 00 BC 03 62 37 The module shows up in the 16 46 13 00 00 BC 03 62 37 Relation List Relation List Y New Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask G 00 00 03 62 37 130 130 130 18 255 255 255 0 1 Delete Enable Disable Renew The status line shows that the software sent the address to Status the module Sent 130 130 130 18 to Ethemet address 00 00 03 62 37 42860 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 1
206. elect all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying 8 Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 10 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network 9 Y Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms 10 inhibit Module Ti Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 9 10 11 12 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 In step 6 did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes If you want the controller to Select the check box fault major fault continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleare
207. elect the slot number that the module is in 6 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 10 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Read or Write Data To or Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module that requires From a Block Transfer pro tauren Module Block Transfer Read Data froma Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word 1 int buffer read 0 dints input 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 dints input 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 dints input 2 1 The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs 2 An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs 2 Block Transfer Write DINTsfromthe Buffer ofINTs Data fora BT project module dints_output 0 int buffer write 0 Word 1 dints_output 1 int buffer write 1 Word 2 dints output 2 int buffer write 2 Word 3 1 An FAL instruction converts the 32 bit integers DINTS from the Logix5000 controller to 16 bit integers INTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs 2
208. ember 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 5 Requested Packet Interval RPI 4 ms J Inhibit Module K Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Made 42401 I In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Rack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update e Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic L Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 6 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network
209. en Yes Click OK No Go to step 6 and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port Click Close Chapter 2 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following Procedure over an EtherNet IP network download a project go online and monitor a controller upload a controller RSLogix 5000 Software je ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 ENBx or E 42473 switch How to Use This Procedure IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure configure the 1756 ENBx or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 To complete this procedure do the following tasks Configure an Ethernet Driver Select a Path Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 2 Download and Go Online over EtherNet IP Network Configure an Ethernet In this task you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with Driver devices on an EtherNet IP network You can configure the driver to communicate with up to 63 devices on this network such as 1756 ENET modules or PLC 5E controllers A Go to RSLinx software B From the Communications menu choose Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list choose Ethernet devices D Choose Add New E If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver change the default name
210. ent data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 10 Configure Dial Up Communications Table 23 C Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number
211. er read message to the same MESSAGE name_of_controller module controller msg_write block transfer write message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller dints to ints converts the 32 bit integers from the Logix5000 CONTROL name of controller controller to 16 bit integers for the BT module controller FAL Length number of elements to convert immediate value equal to length int buffer write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16 bit integers INT 21ength name of controller controller dints output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module Where length DINT length Is the name of controller controller number of elements to transfer 2 Enter the following rung After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs the MSG instruction sends the data in int buffer write to the module dints to ints DN MSG C J3 L Type Block Transfer Write Message Control msg write mom 222 42463 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 14 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Configure the Messages 1 In the MSG instruction click 2 Select a configuration If you want to For this item Type or select read input data Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements number of INTs to read Destination Tag int_buffer_read 0 write configuration or output data
212. ernet D Select the controller and choose a button You may have to confirm the action To Choose monitor the project in the controller Go Online transfer a copy of the project from the controller to Upload RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller Download Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 22 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from remote controllers stations when Your system contains three or more stations Communications occur on a regular basis and require leased line radio or power line modems OY mI 9 T 3 BE ge e 42318 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 2 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications How to Use This Procedure you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary step Step 1 Connect and Configure the Modems To complete this procedure do the following steps Step 2 Select a Polling Mode Step 3 Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling e Step 4 Configure the Master Controller for Message Based Polling Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller e Step 6 Enter a Message
213. es the following warnings The I O LED on the front of the controller flashes green eA A shows over the I O configuration folder and over the device s that has timed out A module fault code is produced which you can access through Module Properties dialog box for the module GSV instruction How do you want to handle the loss of communication with a module in the I O configuration of the controller If you want to Then determine if communication has timed out Enter the following rung and add the specific action to occur with any device If communication times out with at least one device module in the 1 0 configuration of the controller the 1 0 LED on the front of the controller flashes green e The GSV instruction gets the status of the 1 0 LED and stores it in the LED tag e f LED equal 2 the controller has lost communication with at least one device GSV EQU Get System Value Equal CIP Object Class MODULE SourceA O LED CIP Object Name Attribute Name LedStatus Source B 2 Dest O LED 42468 where I O LED isa DINT tag that stores the status of the 1 0 LED on the front of the controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Monitor Connections 15 3 If you want to Then determine if communication has timed out Enter the following rung for the device and add the specific action to occur with a specific device If communication times out with a devi
214. et 0 Data Type Defaut 4243 C Specify the properties of the tag Data Source Y Type Device Memory a p Address El 42432 D Click Device E Click 8 F Select the name of the node that you created in Create an Unsolicited Node and click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 24 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Validate an RSView32 Tag Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 G Type the address for the tag If the controller writes the value Then type the destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction reads the value H Click Accept source address that you specified in the MSG instruction This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects A On the Edit Mode tab double click Tag Monitor Tag Name Value State B Type the name of the RSView tag and press the Enter key Tag Name Value State tag name C What does the State column display If Then valid The tag contains a valid value from the controller error There is a communication problem such as the e controller is not available e server is not running If a MSG instruction reads or writes the value you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time Chapter 8 Communicate with 1756
215. ete this task PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller sends the Go to Access ControlLogix Data on message page 17 20 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline Ege Controller name of controller Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler 22 Power Up Handler Tasks MainTask 5 29 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine CI Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 1 9 Data Types User Defined Predefined Ly Module Defined 9 140 Configuration 42376 B Right click VO Configuration and select New Module C Select your series of 1756 DHRIO module and click OK Name Description zl Parent Local Type Baud Rate Channel DH 57 6K ChannelB RIO 57 6K Revision Ff E Electronic Keying Compatible Module F 42440 D Type a name for the module i e name_of_DHRIO E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 12 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Requested Packet Interval RPI z ms H inhibit Module L Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 H Initia
216. eter meee a 6 8 Configure the PanelView Terminal 6 10 Create Pastel View 5 6 12 Validate 6 14 Chapter 7 When to Use This 7 1 How to Use 7 1 Configure an Ethernet 7 2 Select a Communication Method oos voa Xe HE es 7 3 Create Polled 7 4 Create Polled Node 7 6 Import L gix5000 oi oed 7 7 Create ans LSK Beso bis 44 4 GS Pee 4 ES Po 7 7 Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility 7 8 Use the Utility to Create a CSV File 7 8 Import CSV 7 10 Create a Polled T3985 48 s uus qe s dte qt e a 7 12 Create a Unsolicited 7 14 Add the 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 7 16 Enter a Message ioo sse e e ees Rd A 7 18 Configure the Message 7 20 Create an Unsolicited 7 22 Create an Unsolicited 7 23 Validate RSView32 oi SARS ae Ss SESE IY E34 7 24 Chapter 8 When to Use This 8 1 How to Use This
217. etwork Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 17 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gstablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 t A 2 17 adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info
218. ew tag name To change the name of a tag LR Clear Dest tag name De Right click the tag and choose Fait tag name Properties If you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary tasks Add a 1756 DHRIO Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks Add a Remote I O Adapter Add a Block Transfer Module Communicate with Block Transfer Modules using either of these procedures Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules e Address I O e Validate Connections e Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Add 1756 DHRIO Module Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 3 1 Open the RSLogix 5000 project offline 5 9 Controller name_of_controller A Controller Tags I Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 1 5 Tasks MainT ask 5 29 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends Data Types User Defined Predefined Module Defined 9 140 Configuration m 42376 2 Right click VO Configuration and select New Module 3 Select your series of 1756 DHRIO module and click OK Name Description iA Slot a 5 Parent Local Type Baud Rate Channel A DH X ChannelB RIO E 57
219. ffset GSV 41 0 29 5 AXIS HomeOffset SSV 130 8 108 2 AXIS HomePosition GSV 41 0 29 5 AXIS HomePosition SSV 130 8 108 2 AXIS HomeReturnSpeed GSV 41 2 29 6 AXIS HomeReturnSpeed SSV 131 3 108 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 13 Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS HomeSequence GSV 29 0 20 7 AXIS HomeSequence SSV 130 2 107 6 AXIS HomeSpeed GSV 41 2 29 6 AXIS HomeSpeed SSV 131 3 108 2 AXIS IntegratorHoldEnable GSV 28 2 19 7 AXIS IntegratorHoldEnable SSV 129 4 106 4 AXIS InterpolatedActualPosition GSV 39 3 28 7 AXIS InterpolatedCommandPosition GSV 40 6 29 3 AXIS InterpolationTime GSV 40 0 29 1 AXIS InterpolationTime SSV 130 1 107 9 AXIS Maplnstance GSV 40 4 29 3 AXIS MarkerDistance GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS MasterOffset GSV 59 4 40 5 AXIS MaximumAcceleration GSV 41 2 29 6 AXIS MaximumAcceleration SSV 131 3 108 2 AXIS MaximumDeceleration GSV 40 9 29 4 AXIS MaximumDeceleration SSV 131 3 108 2 AXIS Maximum NegativeTravel GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS Maximum NegativeTravel SSV 29 9 107 0 AXIS MaximumPositive Travel GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS MaximumPositive Travel SSV 29 9 107 0 AXIS MaximumSpeed GSV 41 2 29 6 AXIS MaximumSpeed SSV 131 3 108 2 AXIS MDTConfigurationList GSV 48 3 32
220. fig H amp larmLimit 75 0 MSG Type Module Reconfigure Message Control change_Halarm E 17 43006 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 Reconfigure an 1 0 module Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Numerics 1747 1 0 20 1 1756 1 0 3 1 8 1 1756 CNB module 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 13 1 1756 DHRIO module 17 1 18 1 20 1 1756 ENBx module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 1756 ENET module 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 1756 M02AE module 24 1 1756 NET AIC 19 3 1771 1 0 ControlNet network 9 1 remote 1 0 network 20 1 1788 CNC module 11 1 1791 1 0 20 1 1794 1 0 ControlNet network 10 1 EtherNet IP network 4 1 remote 1 0 network 20 1 1794 AENx module 1 1 4 1 A address map A 1 AIC 19 3 array indexes C 9 asynchronous execution D 1 battery 25 1 block transfers ControlNet network 9 1 remote 1 0 network 20 1 C Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 1 Communicate with 1756 1 0 3 1 8 1 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 1 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 10 1 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 1 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 1 Communicate with an RSView32 Project ControlNet network 14 1 Ethernet network 7 1 Communicate with Another Controller Index ControlNet network 11 1 DH network 17 1 DH 485 network 19 1 Ethernet network 5 1 configure 1756 ENBx or ENET module 1 1 1794 AENx module 1 1 connection
221. folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Wiesen ree Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet M Network 8 15 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 f
222. for the example on page 12 1 MultiHop entries 311 where indicates the 3 node number of the 1756 CNB module on ControlNet network A 1 slot number of the 1756 CNB module on ControlNet network B 1 node number of the PLC 5C controller that is receiving the message Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 12 4 Route PLC 59 Messages Between ControlNet Networks Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 13 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal and a ControlLogix controller over a ControlNet network 42521 ControlNet Network IMPORTANT Before you use this procedure your system must meet these requirements Each 1756 CNB module communicates with no more than three PanelView terminals e Each PanelView terminal communicates scheduled data with only one controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 2 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary task Add the Local 1756 CNB Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks Add the PanelView Terminal Organize Your Scheduled Data Organize Your Unscheduled Data Configure the PanelView Terminal Create PanelView Tags
223. gnosticCounters SerialPort Control modem dial ER 5 Dest serial port 0 String Length 0 Characters Sent 0 42393 Where Is condition condition in your that initiates the dial up sequence modem number array of SINTs that contains the string of ASCII characters that tell the modem to dial a specific telephone number String Length 0 which means to send all the characters in modem_number serial_port array of 19 INTs INT 19 that stores the status of the serial port Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 23 6 Configure Dial Up Communications Step 4 Send the Message A Enter the following logic Serial_port 1 contains the status of the modem signals When bit 3 is on DCD is high the modem is receiving the carrier from the remote modem and communication is established At this point the message is sent to the remote controller serial_port 1 8 message EN MSG 4 4 Type Unconfigured CEN Message Control message CDN gt I CER 42387 Where Is serial_port array of 19 INTs INT 19 that stores the status of the serial port message tag that controls the execution of the message MESSAGE data type B If your message is to a PLC 5 SLC 500 controller and it reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs
224. gs Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show Show All v Sort Tag Name Alias For B p Base Tag 42421 B Select the scope of the descriptive tag e C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 5 D Click the V E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is available All the data for I O modules is at the controller scope Next to name slot X click the sign Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the 1756 CNB module in the chassis slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 G Next to name slot X Data click the sign H Click name slot X Data y where y is the group number that the device is wired to I To the right of the selection click M J Click the bit number of the device K Press the Enter key or click another cell When you finish the Tags window should look similar to this Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start Local 5 Data 0 1 C Local 5 l Data 0 1 C A start is an alias for bit 1 of word 0 of slot 5 in the local chassis Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 16 6 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Step 3 Set t
225. gt Change Decel No I CPCo Decel rate decel rate 2 Decel units of Maximum Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 22 Program Motion Control Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 E When to Use This Procedure How to Use This Procedure Estimate Battery Life Chapter 25 Maintain the 1756 BA1 Battery Use this procedure to ensure that the 1756 BA1 battery has sufficient capacity to maintain the memory of the controller and that the battery does not leak To complete this procedure do the following steps Estimate Battery Life Store Replacement Batteries Replace a Battery When the battery is about 95 percent discharged the controller provides the following warnings On the front of the controller the BAT LED turns on solid red A minor fault occurs type 10 code 10 To prevent the battery from leaking potentially dangerous chemicals replace the battery at least as often as indicated in the following attention ATTENTION To prevent possible battery leakage even if the BAT LED is off replace a battery according to the following schedule below the chassis is 0 to 35 C No required replacement 36 to 40 C 3 years 41 to 45 C 2 years 46 to 50 C 16 months 51 to 55 C 11 months 56 to 60 C 8 months Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 25 2 Maintain the 1756 1 Battery To estimate how long th
226. gth Position Mode Dest Expression fal_control 0 all int buffer fal control pos dint array fal control pos MSG NE 21 C q e Where dint_array Type Unconfigured Message Control message Is an CDN gt CDN gt CER gt 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 20 Configure the Message Table 7 1 Message to a RSView project If the data is And you want to integer s read receive data A Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network In the MSG instruction click H For this item Message Type On the Configuration tab specify the following parameters Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as N7 0 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element logical address such as N7 0 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element logical address such as F8 0 Number Of Ele
227. h Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 8 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no Go to the next step yes output module Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the 1 0 configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration _ g local 1 0 module here x 1756 ENBx local ENB ENET x 1756 ENBx remote ENB ENET a remote 1 0 module here B Where is the module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click 0 Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote ENB or ENET module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _ yp Name Slot 4l a E Description zl Comm Format PO Revision 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module 129 D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot numbe
228. h e type catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 5 Add the PanelView You can establish up to eight connections instances with each Terminal PanelView terminal For example one controller can use all eight instances Or eight controllers can each use one instance Each PanelView instance gives you 100 DINTs of input data 100 DINTs of output data For each instance complete the following steps 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local ENB ENET 1 Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module 2 Select ETHERNET MODULE and choose OK 3 _ Connection Parameters Assembly Instance Size Description E Input 125 4 32 bit a Output 124 32 bit 4 e Comm Format Data
229. hat are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 When to Use This Procedure Chapter 20 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Use this procedure to monitor and control I O over a remote I O network e la mn LI T Remote 1 0 Network R cm a is 88988853 lE ControlLogix Chassis with 2 1756 DHRIO Module Il PanelView Terminal eH i j 1771 ASB Adapter ET SB c PLC 5 Controller LJ 1791 Block 1 0 _ 24 m 1747 ASB Adapter TEST TET TEST 1794 ASB Adapter 42471 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 2 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network How to Use This Procedure To create and manage tags as you program your logic use these tips To create a tag 1 Type the name for the tag 2 Right click the tag and choose N
230. he 1756 DHRIO module 2 Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation For example perform one of the following e Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756 DHRIO module e Connect each chassis to an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DH network 3 Power up each chassis Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 18 4 Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Step Detailed actions C Display the routing table 1 Start RSLinx software To expand a network one level do one of Workstation the following e Double click the network af e Select the network and press the Fr AB_DFI x DF1 key e Click the 4 sign Linx Gateways Ethernet 2 Expand the network from step B until you see the 1756 DHRIO module Workstation Linx Gateways Ethernet AB_DF1 x DF1 xx 1756 Lx Backplane 1756 Ax pe 1756 DHRIO 3 Right click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration 4 Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab D Define the link ID of the backplane At the top of the routing table right click the backplane link and choose in which the 1756 DHRIO module Edit Module resides Type the link ID of the backplane and c
231. he Scanner to Controller name of controller Run Mode Controller Tags 4 9 Controller Fault Handler 9 Power Up Handler B E Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 88 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs i A Double click Controller Tags Tag Name Value r name slot 0 B Next to name s1ot 0 click the sign Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the 1756 CNB module in the chassis slot slot number of the module Tag Name Value name slotO name slot 0 CommandRegister C Next to name slot 0 CommandkRegister click the sign Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 7 Tag Name Value name slotO name slot 0 CommandRegister a name slot 0 CommandRegister Run 0 D In name slot 0 CommandkRegister enter a 1 Tag Name Value Z name slotO name slot 0 CommandRegister ax name slot 0 CommandRegister Run 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 16 8 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 17 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network
232. hoose OK N E Define the link IDs of the 1 Right click the 1756 DHRIO module and choose Edit Module 1756 DHRIO module 2 For each channel type the link ID of the corresponding network 3 Choose OK F Add the remaining communication 1 Right click the backplane and choose Add Module module s that are in the backplane 2 Select the type of device and choose OK chassis 3 Type or select the slot number of the module 4 Type the link ID s of the network s to which the module is connected 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 5 routing table depicts the required networks Step Detailed actions G To the network s created in the 1 Right click the link ID and choose Add Module previous step add the 2 Select the type of device and choose OK corresponding communication 3 Type the node or IP address of the module modules in other ControlLogix 4 the link Dist chassis Type the link ID s For this module Type the link ID s 1756 ENET of the backplane of the module i e the 1756 CNB ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides DH Bridge in the routine table of the added module 5 Choose OK H Repeat steps F and G until the Download and save the configuration 1 To download the configuration to the module choose Apply 2 To save a copy of the configuration as a file ch
233. ide us feedback Wy You can complete this form and mail it back to us visit us online at www ab com manuals or email us at RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Pub Title Type ControlLogix System Cat No 1756 L1 L1Mx Pub No 1756 UM001D EN P Pub Date November 2001 Part No 957626 25 L55Mxx L63 n Please complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature 1 needs improvement 2 satisfactory and 3 outstanding Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you C 2 3 Can we add more information to help you ompleteness all necessary information procedure step illustration feature is provided T example guideline other explanation definition Technical Accuracy 1 2 3 Can we be more accurate all provided information is correct text illustration Clarity 1 Z 28 How can we make things clearer all provided information is easy to understand Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form Your Name Location Phone Your Title Function Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments No there is no need to contact me Yes please call me Yes please email me at Yes please contact me via Return this form to Allen Bradley Marketing Communications 1 Allen Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124 9705 Phone 440 646 3176 Fax 440 646 3525 Email RADocumentComments ra rockwell c
234. iew Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal Procedure and a ControlLogix controller over a EtherNet IP network 00000 42817 switch Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To produce and consume tags over an EtherNet IP network you must use a 1756 ENBx or ENET B module If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the ENB or ENET module in the local chassis Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 2 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a EtherNet IP Network How to Use This Procedure you have not already done so in a previous procedure do the following preliminary task Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module To complete this procedure do the following tasks Add the PanelView Terminal Organize Your Data Configure the PanelView Terminal Create PanelView Tags To check your work do the following task e Validate Connections Publication 1756 U
235. ility Logix 5000 Tag Import msi where language is the language of your software For example for software that is in English open the Enu folder C Copy the file to your computer D To install the utility open the file Use the Utility to Create a CSV File A Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility m Data source Node name 4 Scan class Logix 5000 tags Tag file name Browse p C Filter Search 43 D Put tags into folder Add FS Lins topic to tag address 43071 Type the name of the node from Create a Polled Node C Select the L5K file D Choose Search Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 E Select the tags to import Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 9 F Type the name of the topic from Create a Polled Topic G H Choose OK Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 10 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Import the CSV File A Start the Database Import amp Export wizard Start Programs gt Rockwell Software RSView Studio Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard Start Programs Rockwell Software RSView32 Tools Database Import amp Export Wizard B Complete the screens of the wizard i Database Import Export Wizard xj Select the type of database you want to import or export
236. imate Battery Life es csu sosea Soph ee oa CE ee 25 1 Store Replacement 25 4 Replace a see uate wati toe e a A 25 4 PLC SLC Address Estimate Execution Time Estimate Memory Use Determine When Data Is Updated Reconfigure an 1 0 module Table of Contents ix Appendix A When Use This Procedure 1 an Address 1 Appendix When to Use This B 1 Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction B 1 Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine B 23 Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action B 28 Appendix C Using This C 1 Data GONversiOns ard e oy meto e e aed C 1 Sign Extension Memory Requirements C 1 Zero Fill Memory Requirements C 2 Ladder 5 C 3 Function Block C 7 Array INCEXCS4 444 9X a ESR LOLS ELD OF OME OSS BAS C 9 Appendix D 1 Appendix Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table of Contents Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 1 Configure an EtherNet IP Module When to Use This Use this procedure to configure any of the following modules Procedure 1756 ENBx or ENET 1794 AEN
237. ination SINT INT 0 0 5 If you use an expression in the index additional memory is used depending on the operators Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 132 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT DINT DINT 6 If you use multiple arrays in one instructions add the appropriate memory use for each array reference Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 184 bytes Source DINT DINT Destination DINT DINT MOV instruction 320 bytes Source DINT DINT DINT DINT Destination DINT DINT DINT DINT Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 12 Estimate Memory Use Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 D Determine When Data Is Updated ControlLogix controllers update date asynchronous with the execution of logic Use the following flowchart to determine when a producer controller input module or bridge module will send data input or output data output p gt analog or digital digital input analog analog or digital digital remote or local analog COS for any point on the N remote 0 No module pp aq RTS lt RPI Yes local Yes Data is sent to the backplane Data is sent to the backplane at at the RTS the RTS and RPI Y Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI and at the change of a specified point Data
238. ine the end of the sequence of MSGs SIZE D Size in Elements Source input 0 0 pe Dim To Vary 0 Size BT input modules Oe 43020 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope BT_input data from each BT module DINT number length name of controller e The first dimension represents each controller module e The second dimension represents the data from a module BT_input_modules number of modules that the MSG instruction DINT name_of_controller must read controller Where number Is the number of modules that this message reads length Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers 1 Move Move Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet M Network 9 15 Send a Block Transfer Read Message 1 Enter the following rung The MSG instruction reads the input values from a BT module and stores the values in int buffer read e Each time the instruction is done it automatically restarts and sends another message e Prior to each message the series of MOV and COPY instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module The configuration properties load from the _ array e After each MSG a subsequent rung increments the BTR_index tag This loads the configuration properties for the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again BTR EN MOV MO
239. ing the data Method If the data Then go to needs regular delivery at a rate that you Create a Polled Topic on page 14 4 specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in Create a Unsolicited Topic on page 14 14 your application Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Create a Polled Topic RSLogix 5000 software revision 10 0 or later automatically creates DDE OPC topics in RSLinx p software whenever you create a project save a project change the revision of a project to 10 0 or later In some cases you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software as shown in steps E G of this section A Display RSLinx software B From the DDE OPC menu select Topic Configuration C In the bottom left corner of the window click New D Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key To expand a network one level do one of the following Double click the network e Select the network and press the key e Click the sign Data Source Workstation ee AB_KTC x ControlNet E On the Data Source tab expand the ControlNet driver e g AB_KTC 1 until you see the ControlLogix controller Data Source Workstation AB_KTC x ControlNet
240. input 0 2 BT input 0 3 3 4 BT_input 0 4 Word 1 int buffer BT input 1 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 BT input 1 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 BT input 12 Word 4 int buffer read 3 BT input 1 3 Word 5 int buffer read 4 BT input 1 4 Input data that is allocated for the first BT module Input data that is allocated for the next BT module The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the first BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTS Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The MSG instruction reads the next module This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 16 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network To read multiple block transfer modules Create a User Defined Data Type Create the Data Array Send the Message to a BT Module Enter the Message Properties for Each Module Convert the INTs to DINTs Step to the Next BT Module To write data to multiple block transfer modules see the logic on page 20 24 Publicatio
241. instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs B7R_ints_to_dints DN is on the ADD instruction increments the B7R_index This lets the MSG instruction read the next module BTF_ints_to_dints DN DD Add Source 1 Source B BTR index 0e Dest BTR index De 43021 2 Enter the following rung If the EQU instruction is true the MSG instruction has read the last BT module The CLR instruction resets index to zero This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again starting with the first module EQU LR Equal Clear Source indes Dest index De 0e Source B BT input modules 0 43021 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 20 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over ControlNet Network Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules SIZE 6 Size in Elements Source BT_output 0 0 pe Dim To Vary 0 Size BT output modules ge 43022 BTW EN BTw_dints_to_ints MOV 7 gt i RE Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index REQ_LEN 0 Dest BT W_dints_to_ints LEN 0e File Arith Logical Control Length Position Mode Ro Dest BTW_int_buffer_write BTW_dints_to_ints POS 0 Expression BT output BTw index BTW dints to ints PQ5 43022 BTw dints to ints DN MOV 8 Move Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Source BTW cfa BTw index REG LEN 0 Dest BTw REG LEN MOV Copy File Move Source BT W_cfo BTW_index Path Source
242. ion Fails While in Run Mode 42401 I In step F did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm Format If Then No Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update Yes No RPI is required Go to the next step Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 11 J Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box K If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating L Click Finish Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 12 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Create Aliases In this task you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points or channels devices As an alias for an I O point or channel each tag provides a descri
243. is number to determine the end of the sequence of MSGs SIZE Size in Elements Source BT_input 0 0 De Dim To Vary 0 Size BT_input_modules De 43014 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties 0 Name Description BT_input data from each BT module e The first dimension represents each module e The second dimension represents the data from a module Data Type Scope DINT number length name of controller controller BT input modules number of modules that the MSG instruction must read Where number DINT name of controller controller Is the number of modules that this message reads length Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 19 Send the Message to a BT Module 1 Enter the following rung The MSG instruction reads the input values from BT module and stores the values in B7R_int_buffer_read e Each time the instruction is done it automatically restarts and sends another message e Prior to each message the series of MOV and COPY instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module The configuration properties load from the array e After each MSG a subsequent rung increments the BTR_index tag This loads the configuration properties f
244. is sent to the backplane at the RPI Over a ControlNet network remote data is sent at the actual packet Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI interval and at the end of every task e Over an EtherNet IP network remote data is sent close to the RPI on average Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 D 2 Determine When Data Is Updated Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 reconfigure 5 change_Halarm EN Appendix E Reconfigure an 1 0 module Use the Module Reconfigure message to send new configuration information to an I O module During the reconfiguration Input modules continue to send input data to the controller Output modules continue to controller their output devices A Module Reconfigure message requires the following configuration properties In this property Select Message Type Module Reconfigure To reconfigure an I O module 1 Set the required member of the configuration tag of the module to the new value 2 Send a Module Reconfigure message to the module Reconfigure an I O module When reconfigure 5 is on the MOV instruction sets the high alarm to 60 for the local module in slot 4 The Module Reconfigure message then sends the new alarm value to the module The ONS instruction prevents the rung from sending multiple messages to the module while the reconfigure 5 is on MOV Move Source Dest Local 4 C ChOCon
245. ize of Ladder Instructions Data Type REA REA L L Memory 76 bytes overhead 44 bytes for the MUL operation 44 bytes for the DIV operation 164 bytes total Instruction Memory for DINT bytes Memory for REAL bytes ABL 52 ABL 52 ABS 32 56 ABS 32 56 ACB 52 ACB 52 ACL 64 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 4 Estimate Memory Use Table C 3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Memory for DINT bytes Memory for REAL bytes KL WENN ACS 140 48 ACS 140 48 ADD 28 m ADD 28 m AFI 4 AHL 68 AND 28 ARD 76 ARL 76 ASN 140 48 ATN 140 48 AVE 164 116 AWA 80 AWT 80 BRK m BSL 52 BSR 52 BTD 52 CLR 20 20 CMP 76 76 CONCAT 116 64 64 0 140 48 64 64 CPT 76 96 CTD 8 CTU 8 DDT 72 DEG 144 52 DELETE 108 DIV m m DTOS 72 DTR 40 EQU 20 20 FAL 92 116 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Memory Use C 5 Table C 3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Memory for DINT bytes Memory for REAL bytes FBC 72 FFL 64 64 FFU 64 64 FIND 108 FLL 60 60 FOR 64 FRD 40 FSC 148 152 GEQ 20 36 GRT 20 36 GSV 84 84 INSERT 124 JMP 24 JSR 56 L
246. ject you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options e Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Access ControlLogix Data Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 23 Complete this task for any message that a PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over an EtherNet IP network IMPORTANT This procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller B If the message is from a SLC 5 05 controller in the MSG instruction select PLC MSG Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read Target Device PLCS Local Remote Local Control Block N7 0 Control Block Length 93 Setup Screen 42474 C Display
247. k remote network Complete this task ControlLogix controller PLC 5 controller local network SLC 500 controller Go to Add a 1756 DHRIO Module on page 17 11 remote network Complete this task ControlLogix controller gt Vivi Go to Add a 1756 DHRIO Module on page 17 11 The following example shows a local message and a remote message from a PLC 5 controller Any type of network can link the ControlLogix chassis EXAMPLE Local and remote messages ControlNet network 2 Remote Message DICIS HINIS RIBIS 0 0 DH network Local p Message 5 In this task you configure routing tables for 1756 DHRIO modules The modules use the routing tables to send the message to the destination Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 4 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network In the following example two ControlLogix chassis link different DH networks together via a ControlNet network EXAMPLE Routing table ControlNet ControlNet network ControlNet node 1 link ID 100 node 2 DC DC HIN ControlLogix HIN ControlLogix RIB backplane RIB backplane link ID 10 link ID 30 0 0 channel A channel A DH node 2 DH node 3
248. k box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 9 Add the Other Controller 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local ENB ENET x 1756 ENBx remote ENB ENET a4 A Right click remote ENB ENET and select New Module B Select the type of controller and choose OK Name Slot 0 E Description A Revision mj Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42377 Type the name of the controller D Type or select the slot number of the controller E Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 10 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network F f Inhibit Module J MajorFault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 F Initially do you want the module to communicate with th
249. ks tal MainT ask 5 28 MainProgram Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs 42376 B Create the following tags Scope Name Data Type controller list_priority_poll DINT x where 152 plus the number of stations that you will poll more frequently than other stations For example if you want to poll 5 stations more frequently create an array of 7 elements controller list normal poll DINT x where x 152 plus the remaining number of stations The stations that you did not include in 22st priority poll controller list active stations BOOL 256 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 4 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 65 Controller name of controller Controller T ags J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler a Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 9 Unscheduled Programs ae Right click Controller name of controller and select Properties Click the Serial Port tab S Controller Properties Ascii examples Major Faults MinorFauts Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Mode Baud Rate 1920 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits ho H Control Line Handshake f Je continuous Garter BTS Send Delay D x20 ms RTS Off Delay 0 x20 ms
250. le that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 C Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data However the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the structure for the communication module e g ENB CNB start conveyor l Slot 1 Data 1 1E LII FT HA 42435 pile FT1 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 15 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gstablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms i
251. lements to convert immediate value equal to length dint_inputs array that stores the input data from the module DINT 1ength name of controller for use by the controller Where length Is the number of el controller ements to transfer Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output which is an array of DINTs Before the controller sends the data to the module the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write This converts them to 16 bit integers INTs Only include the msg_read EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module msg read EN msg write EN dints to ints FAL J E 4 6 CRES 4 File Arith Logical Control dints_to_ints Length CDN gt Position 0 ALL CERD Dest int_buffer_write dints_to_ints POS Expression dints_output dints_to_ints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message to the same MESSAGE name_of_controller module controller msg_write block transfer write message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller dints to ints converts the 32 bit integers from the Logix5000 CONTROL name of controller controller to 16 bit integers for th
252. lements to transfer Destination Element Table 5 B Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s first element of the tag for the data in the other controller And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Table 5 C Message to a PLC 5 controller If
253. ller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 4 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add the Remote 1756 CNB E 120 Configuration Module 5 1756 CNB B name of local cnb 42399 A Right click name of local and select New Module B Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK C Name E 4 D n Chassis Size 10 E 2 Description F sudo Comm Format Rack Optimization X Revision EN H Electronic Keying Compatible Module 7 H 42404 C Type a name for the CNB module Use a name that identifies the T O in the chassis D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis F Are most of the modules in the chassis non diagnostic digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None G Type or select the slot number where the module is installed H How closely must any module in this slot match the information
254. lly do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 13 I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 14 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG jus CEN e Message Control E DN5 e A e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message
255. lview O Data 3 0 0 42403 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 13 10 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network Organize Your Unscheduled 7o transfer unscheduled data with the PanelView terminal organize the tags in the ControlLogix controller as follows Data If data type of the tag is And it is part of a structure or array including an 1 0 device And the PanelView writes the data a Create a tag of the DINT data type b Copy bit z of the DINT tag to the BOOL tag PanelView reads the data a Create a tag of the DINT data type BOOL b Copy the BOOL tag to bit z of the DINT tag a Create a tag of the DINT data type ngr partake structure dr b Convert the BOOL tag to an alias for bit z array of the DINT tag lt 32767 PanelView writes the data a Create a tag of the INT data type b Move the INT tag to the DINT tag DINT PanelView reads the data a Create a tag of the INT data type b Move the DINT tag to the INT tag gt 32767 PanelView writes the data a Create a tag of the REAL data type b Move the REAL tag to the DINT tag DINT PanelView reads the data a Create a tag of the REAL data type b Move the DINT tag to the REAL tag where z is bit O to 15 of the DINT tag Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 11 EXA
256. lview O Data x y PanelView writes the data Move name of panelview I Data z tothe tag DINT Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 PanelView reads the data Where name of panelview Move the tag to name of panelview O Data z Is name of the PanelView terminal in the 1 0 configuration of the controller x element of the PanelView terminal input I or output 0 structure You can use this element for up to 16 bits y bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element 2 unique element of the PanelView terminal input I or output 0 structure Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a ControlNet Network 13 9 EXAMPLE Organize scheduled e time critical data Copies the value of name of panelview I Data O 1 to station_1_stop name_of_panelview l Data 0 1 station 1 stop jt C2 Copies the value of station 1 run to name of panelview O DaltalO O station m dd name of panelview O Data 0 0 ASE C 2 alarm ach and alarm are aliases for data that the PanelView terminal writes and reads alarm alarm lt name_of_panelview l Data 0 2 gt lt name_of_panelview O Data 0 1 gt EE UD Moves name of panelview I Data 5 to counter PRE a DINT tag and moves counter ACC a DINT tag to name panelview O Data 5 MOV MOV Move Move Source name of panelview l Data 3 Source counter ACC 0 0 Dest counter PRE Dest name of pane
257. major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying 7 Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address A Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 B Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 8 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over EtherNet IP Network 4 5 Add the Remote 1794 AENx Module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local ENB ENET A 1 Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module 2 Select the type of AEN module that you are using and click OK 3 Name AE Address Host Name Description x C Address Host Name lt Unspecitied gt 4 amp Comm Format Rack Optimization 5 Chassis Size Revision zi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42816 3 Type a name for the module Use a name that identifies the I O on this rail 4 Are most of the modules on this rail digital I O modules If Then select Yes Rack Optimization No None 5 Type or select the number of I O modules on this rail Publication 1756 UM001D
258. mapping table is loaded into the controller and is used whenever a logical address accesses data You can only access controller scoped tags global data Map an Address 1 In RSLogix 5000 software open the project file for the controller whose data you want to access 2 From the Logic menu select Map PLC SLC Messages Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 a PLC SLC Address Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 PLC2 3 5 SLC Mapping x PLC 3 5 SLC Mapping DK File Number Cancel Help Delete Map 2 Mapping Tag Name 42260 3 For each file that is referenced a PLC 5 or SLC command make a map entry a Type the file number of the logical address b Type or select the controller scoped global tag that supplies or receives data for the file number You can map multiple files to the same tag 4 For PLC 2 commands specify the tag that supplies or receives the data 5 Click OK When to Use This Procedure Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction Appendix B Estimate Execution Time Use this appendix to estimate the time required for the execution of instructions and motion tasks To See page Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction B 1 Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine B 23 Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action B 28 Times are for a ControlLogix co
259. mber of the 1756 DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller Local Remote Local Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 22 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network Table 17 D Set up for a message from a PLC 5 controller to a ControlLogix controller Continued For a remote message In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local DH Node Octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the PLC 5 controller Local Remote Remote Remote Link Type Data Highway Remote Station Address slot number of the ControlLogix controller converted to octal Remote Bridge Link ID link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides Table 17 E Set up for a message from a SLC 500 controller to a ControlLogix controller For a local message In this item Communication Command Specify PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the SLC 500 c
260. me Description Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt E Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 5 Add the Remote 1756 ENBx or ENET Module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 ENBx local_ENB ENET 8 A Right click local_ENB ENET and select New Module B Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK C h Name Address Host Name Des
261. me tags over an EtherNet IP network you must use 1756 ENBx or ENET B modules If you have a 1756 ENET A module determine if you can update the module For this 1756 ENET A revision Then 1 18 or later latch of the RJ 45 Update the firmware of module to connector points to the left revision 2 6 or later earlier than 1 18 latch of the RJ 45 Contact your Rockwell Automation connector points to the right representative or local distributor 2 Configure the ENB or ENET modules Refer to Configure an EtherNet IP Module on page 1 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 2 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Select a Communication To communicate with another controller you have the following Method options If the other controller is And ControlLogix The data needs delivery at a specific rate Then Produce and consume a tag Go to Produce a Tag on page 5 3 The data is sent when a specific condition in your application occurs Send a message Go to Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 14 PLC 5 The ControlLogix controller sends the SLC 5 05 message Send a message Go to Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 14 The PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 sends the message Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Send a message Go to Access ControlLogix Data on page 5 23 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network 5 3
262. ments number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse 2 address where logical address such as F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the ENB or and click OK In the Path text box add address is the IP address or DNS name of the workstation EXAMPLE Complete path entry washer_chassis 2 130 130 128 4 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 21 G On the Communication tab specify the following parameters For this item Communication Method Type or select CIP With Source ID Source Link Remote ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step L Destination Link Virtual Link ID from Create a Unsolicited Topic step D Destination Node H Click OK 71 RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 22 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Create an Unsolicited Node Open the RSView project ime YOUR_RSVIEW_PROJECT RSY Project Explorer Your RSView
263. municate with PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gesrablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local_com_module 2 t A 2 17 adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Wiesen ree Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 15 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents
264. munication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 13 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 6 Add a Remote 1 0 Adapter Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network In this task you add remote I 0 adapters for each rack or portion of a rack in the chassis If the chassis contains less than 1 rack of 1 0 Then add 1 adapter for the chassis 1 rack of 1 0 more than 1 rack of I O 1 adapter for each rack EXAMPLE Add remote I O adapters The I O configuration of the controller requires two remote I O adapters for this chassis One adapter is for rack 1 and the second adapter is for the 1 2 of rack 2 rack 1 rack 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 gt 0 Configuration x 1756 DHRIO x name_of_DHRIO 1 Right click name_of_DHRIO and select New Module 2
265. n 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 17 Create a User Defined Data Type Create the following data type You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types User Defined 4 1 Right click and select New Data Type 2 Assign the following Name BT_CONFIGURATION Description Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module Members Name Data Type Style Description REQ_LEN INT Decimal number of elements INTs to read or write Channel SINT ASCII channel A or B of the 1756 DHRIO module to which this module is connected Rack SINT Octal rack number of the module octal Group SINT Decimal group number of the module Slot SINT Decimal slot number of the module Path STRING path to the 1756 DHRIO module Use the Message Path editor to assign the path Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 18 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Create the Data Array 1 Enter the following rung The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension Dim 0 of the B7 input array Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read A subsequent rung uses th
266. n alias for an I O point or channel each tag provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change EZB C The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the motor is an alias for the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis When the push button the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis named conveyor is on startis on When motorturns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 2 Data 0 gt lt Local 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt JE JE en motor conveyor 0 0 Data 0 3E 42435 A From the Zogic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show Show All Sore 7 Alias For Base Tag Type 42421 e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network 8 11 B Select the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W D Click the W E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it is availa
267. nd A 83 65 clutch A 138 76 position camming actual linear A 441 239 position camming actual cubic A 531 302 position camming command linear A 232 144 position camming command cubic A 356 210 time camming linear A 180 117 time camming cubic A 287 167 1 This value is worst case producer consumer update ratio 2 3 To reduce the time by 2596 use a consumer coarse update period that is an integer multiple of the producer coarse update period e g 2 4 C Estimate Memory Use Using This Appendix Use this appendix to calculate the memory used for data conversions instructions and array indexes Values are for ControlLogix controllers Cat No 1756 11 L1Mx L55Mxx and RSLogix 5000 software TIP When you download your project the controller optimizes memory use which could reduce your calculated memory use by as much as 10 from the gt values presented in this appendix To calculate the memory for See page Data Conversions C 1 Ladder Instructions C 3 Function Block Instructions C 7 Array Indexes C 9 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 2 Estimate Memory Use Data Conversions If you use a data type that is not an optimal data type or if you mix data types you must add memory for data conversion Sign Extension Memory Requirements Use the following table to determine the memory required to convert data by sign extension Table C 1 Memory Size of a Co
268. nder Node Name right click End of Node List and select Insert Node Network Nodes Hode Address Path Hode Type Allen Bradley PLC of Mode List 42818 12 Select ControlLogix5000 Hetwork Nodes Hode Address Path Hode Type Allen Bradley PLC m End of Node List 14 15 42818 13 Type a name for the ControlLogix controller 14 Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller 15 Type the path to the ControlLogix controller Use the following format space 1 controller_slot where controller_slot isthe slot number of the ControlLogix controller 16 Click OK 17 Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 12 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Create PanelView Tags 1 On the PanelView screen create the required object 2 Double click the object 3 Click the Edit Tag button Tag Name Data Type 4 Bit q 5 6 M ing T puede Node Name Network Address C Assembly Object Description Tag Address Tag Initial Value B JMh MlMMo 42856 Type a name for the object 5 In the ControlLogix controller is the address of this tag a bit BOOL within an array of BOOLs If Then select Yes bit No data type that matches the data type of the tag in the ControlLogix c
269. nformation must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying I Click Next J Requested Packet Interval RPI ES ms K Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode m J In step F which Comm Format did you select If Then Hack Optimization Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc None No RPI is required Go to the next step K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 7 L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box con
270. nhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 16 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 905 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 4 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to monitor and control I O devices that are wired Procedure to 1794 I O modules when a e 1756 ENBx or a 1756 ENET B module connects the local chassis to a EtherNet IP network e 1794 AENx module connects the 1794 I O modules to the same EtherNet IP network 1756 ENBx or ENET 1794 AENx module module
271. nt_buffer_read BTR_ints_to_dints POS 43015 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties Name Description Data Type Scope BTR ints to dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 project controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 23 Step to the Next BT Module 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs B7R_ints_to_dints DN is on the ADD instruction increments the index This lets the MSG instruction read the next module ints to dints DN DD Add Source 1 Source B BTR index pe Dest index 0 43015 2 Enter the following rung If the EQU instruction is true the MSG instruction has read the last BT module The CLR instruction resets B7R_index to zero This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again starting with the first module EQU LA Equal Clear Source BTF_index Dest BTR index De oe Source BT input modules De 43015 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 24 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules SIZE 5 Size in Elements Source BT output 0 0 pe Dim To Vary D Size BT output modules pe 43035 BTW EN BTw dints to ints B
272. ntroller Cat No 1756 L1 L1Mx L55Mxx and RSLogix 5000 software ose this information to select among different programming options Actual execution times may vary because of the configuration of your project and the version of RSLogix 5000 software that you are using 1 From Table B 2 on page B 3 find the base time for the instruction 2 To the base time of the instruction add time for expressions subscripts and data conversions If an operand Then add time for Using this table contains an expression each operation in the expression Table B 2 on page B 3 For each operation use the time for the corresponding instruction is an element of an array the calculation of the array Table B 4 on page B 22 and one or more of the subscript subscripts is a tag e g tag c tag is converted by the data conversion Table B 1 on page B 3 sign extension contains a SINT or INT tag the conversion of the SINT or INT in an array subscript to a DINT Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 Estimate Execution Time Examples Instruction Data Type Execution Time CMP tag a tag b 100 4 3 us overhead MUL REAL 18 0 us for the MUL operation DIV REAL 18 8 us for the DIV operation 41 1 us total ADD 10 8 us for the ADD instruction Source A DINT 8 5 us for DINT to REAL conversion Source B REAL Destination REAL 19 3 us total ADD 10 8 us for the ADD instruction Sou
273. nversion by Sign Extension To convert a From a To a Add bytes Source operand SINT DINT 48 REAL 120 INT DINT 60 REAL 132 DINT REAL 76 Destination operand DINT SINT 52 INT 52 REAL 76 REAL SINT 72 INT 72 DINT 72 Zero Fill Memory Requirements Use the following table to determine the memory required to convert data by zero fill Table 2 Memory Size of a Conversion by Zero Fill To convert a From a To a Add bytes Source operand SINT DINT 0 INT DINT 8 Destination operand DINT SINT 88 INT 100 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Ladder Instructions Estimate Memory Use C 3 Examples Instruction Data Type Memory bytes ADD REAL 44 bytes for the ADD instruction Source A DINT 76 bytes for DINT to REAL conversion by sign extension Source B REAL Destination REAL 120 bytes total MUL REAL 44 bytes for MUL instruction Source A REAL Source B DINT 76 bytes for DINT to REAL conversion by sign extension Destination DINT 76 bytes for REAL to DINT conversion by sign extension 192 bytes total The following table shows the memory use of the ladder instructions For those instructions that use an expression CMP CPT FAL FSC add memory for each operation within the expression For each operation use the value for the corresponding instruction Example Instruction CMP tag a tag b 100 MUL DIV Table C 3 Memory S
274. ock Transfer Read Message e Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module Convert the INTs to DINTs Step to the Next BT Module To write data to multiple block transfer modules see the logic on page 9 20 Create a User Defined Data Type Create the following data type You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module Controller Tasks Motion Groups Trends Data Types User Defined 1 Right click and select New Data Type 2 Assign the following BT_CONFIGURATION Description Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module Members Name Data Type Style Description REQ_LEN INT Decimal number of elements INTs to read or write Slot SINT Decimal slot number of the module Path STRING path to the 1771 ACN module Use the Message Path editor to assign the path Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 14 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over ControlNet Network Create the Array for the Input Data Enter the following rung The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension Dim 0 of the B7 input array Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read A subsequent rung uses this number to determ
275. og Setup I Scan Class Tag Database Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 Double click Node C DDE Server D Name v Enabled Server Name El q4 E 42430 Data Source Direct Driver C Click OPC Server D Type a name for the node E Click 8 F Select RSLinx OPC Server and click OK G Click Accept H Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 7 Import Logix5000 Tags To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility Create an L5K File e Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility Use the Utility to Create a CSV File Import the CSV File Create an L5K File A Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access B From the File menu choose Save As CINES x Save in Projects P ek E3 Samples File name I Save as type RSLogis 5000 Import Export File L5K Cancel L 43070 C Select RSLogix 5000 Import Export File L5K D Choose Save Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 8 Communicate with RSView Project over EtherNet IP Network Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility A Get your RSLogix 5000 software CD B On the CD find the following file language Tools Tag Import Ut
276. ograms to aliases for I O points or channels devices As an alias for an I O point or channel each tag provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change EXAMPLE o The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the motor is an alias for the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor When the push the module that is in slot 1 of the rail named conveyor When button is on start is on motor turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt conveyor 2 Data 0 gt lt conveyor 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 1 0 Data 0 gt JE JE O gt motor lt conveyor 1 0 Data 0 gt 42435 A From the Zogic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show Show All Sore TagName 2 Alias For 1 Base Tag Type 42421 e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over ControlNet Network 10 11 Select the scope of the descriptive tag To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a
277. oller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 If the message is to a PLC 5 controller Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 15 Click the Communication tab Click Browse Select that controller that receives the message and click OK Complete the communication parameters Then 1 Leave the C P button selected 2 Disregard the Cache Connection check box Logix5000 controller e ControlLogix controller e FlexLogix controller How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to If Then 16 less Logix5000 Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked controllers more than 16 1 Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the Logix5000 controllers most frequent messages 2 Is this message to one of those controllers If Then Yes Leave the Cache Connection check box selected checked No Clear the Cache Connection check box G Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 16 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 7 Stagger the Messages Step 8 Access ControlLogix Data As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules
278. om Publication ICCG 5 21 January 2001 PN 955107 82 Other Comments PLEASE FASTEN HERE DO NOT STAPLE PLEASE FOLD HERE BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE Allen Bradley RELIANCE Emo ROCKWELL FEY SOFTWARE DOGE Rockwell Automation 1 ALLEN BRADLEY DR MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124 9705 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES PLEASE REMOVE Rockwell Automation For technical assistance call your local Rockwell ee representative or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following Support Hos Phone United 1 440 646 5800 States Canada Outside United You can access the phone number for your States Canada country via the Internet 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com 3 Under Support Centers click on Contact Information Internet gt 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com Your Questions or Comments on this Manual If you find a problem with this manual please notify us of it on the enclosed How Are We Doing form Allen Bradley ControlLogix DH FlexLogix PanelView PLC 5 RSLinx RSLogix RSNetWorx RSView32 and SLC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd Ethernet is a tradem
279. on controller PLC 5 controller 1 4 2 SLC 500 controller i C CP DH Channel Destination Link E c CIP with Source Link Destination Node E Source ID A A 42467 3 5 1 DH 2 channel that is connected to the DH network 3 source link For a Specify local message 0 zero remote message link ID of the ControlLogix backplane local chassis 4 destination link For a Specify local message 0 zero remote message link ID of the destination network 5 in octal the DH node address of the PLC 5or SLC 500 controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 19 The following examples depicts a communication path over an DH network channel A DH network DH address 10 octal 5 1 5 1 5H Message 5H 5 5 0 0 0 0 washer 2 8 10 1 0 where X indicates washer name of the 1756 DHRIO module 2 channel A of the 1756 DHRIO module 8 10 octal address of the 1756 DHRIO module in the destination chassis 1 backplane port of the 1756 DHRIO module in the destination chassis 0 slot number of the destination controller G Select a cache option If the message is to a Then PLC 5 controller Disregard the Cache Connection check box SLC 500 controller Logix5000 controller How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send
280. on number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET B module no information must match Disable Keying G Type the IP address or host name of the module To specify an Do this Example IP address 1 Select the P Address button 130 151 136 164 2 Type the IP address host name Type the host name aurora6 H Click Finisb Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 16 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Enter a Message A Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction s e condition MSG CEN e Message Control E DN5 e A e 42424 In the MSG instruction type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key In the MSG instruction right click the message control tag and select New tag name In older revisions of the software the menu option is Create tag name From the Scope list select name of controller controller and click OK e condition X MSG e J Unconfigured I EN e Message Control message ER gt e Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message is to a
281. onfigure the modems Configure this signal To DSR be on high when a modem connection exists DCD CD be on high whenever the modem receives the carrier from the remote modem DTR hang up when the controller changes the DTR signal from on to off E g Set DTR to normal not override Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Step 2 Configure the Serial Port of the Controller Configure Dial Up Communications 23 3 A Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the controller 5 5 Controller name of controller Controller Tags 2 Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 1 9 Tasks 5 68 MainTask 5 8 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs due Right click Controller name of controller and select Properties Click the Serial Port tab o Controller Properties Ascii examples Ox Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Mode Baud Rate fiszoo Data Bits fe zl Parity None Stop Bits nh sz Control Line No Handshake f J Gontnuous Garnier BTS Send Delay D 20 RTS Of Delay 0 42251 Select System default Select the settings for your DF1 network Select Full Duplex Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example
282. ons If the data Then use a needs regular delivery at a rate that you polled message specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in unsolicited message your application Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 7 2 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network Configure an Ethernet In this task you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with Driver devices on an EtherNet IP network You can configure the driver to communicate with up to 63 devices on this network such as 1756 ENET modules or PLC 5E controllers A Go to RSLinx software B From the Communications menu choose Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list choose Ethernet devices D Choose Add New E If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver change the default name F Choose OK Station Mapping Station Add New Delete G In the Host Name column type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet IP device with which you want to communicate 42585 Examples aurora 130 151 136 164 H Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet IP device on this network Yes 1 Choose Add New 2 Go to Step G No Go to the next step I Choose OK J Choose Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 3 Select a Communication Select a method for transferring the data Method If the data Then
283. ontroller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element name where name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Table 22 Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Configure Master and Slave Communications 22 15 Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfe
284. ontroller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Data Table Address Target Device in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local Node Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller remote message Communication Command PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address This Controller starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Data Table Address Target Device Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count Local Bridge Addr octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the SLC 500 controller Remote Bridge Addr 0 Remote Station Address slot number of the ControlLogix controller converted to octal Remote Bridge Link ID Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides When to Use This Procedure Chapter 18 Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Use this procedure to route a message from a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller that is on a DH network to a PLC 5 or SLC 500 controller that is on a different network The controller that receives the message can be
285. ontroller 6 Is this data time critical e g turn a machine on or off If Then select No A Network Address B From the Node Name list select the controller Yes Assembly Object Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 13 7 Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller If the message type And its data the Specify is type is Network Address gt p array_name element Assembly Object bit PanelView writes the data Alx y z PanelView reads the data AOx y z DINT PanelView writes the data Alx y PanelView reads the data A 0x y Where Is array name name of the array in the controller element element number within the array instance number of this connection with the controller If the input assembly And the output assembly Then the instance number instance is instance is is 7 6 1 9 8 2 11 10 3 3 2 4 5 14 5 7 16 6 9 18 7 21 20 8 y element of the PanelView input or output structure in the controller 2 bit number within the input or output element EXAMPLE Specify the address of a tag in the ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller PanelView Application name of panelview l Data 0 1 Al1 0 1 name of panelview O Data 3 A01 3 screen a 5 screen a 5 8 Click OK 9 Click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 14 Com
286. oose OK BTR cfg 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 18 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Convert the INTs to DINTs Enter the following rung After the MSG instruction reads data from a module DN is on this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads e The FAL instruction then loads the values from int buffer read into BT input This converts the values to DINTs for use in the project e BTR_index determines where in the first dimension of B7_input to store the values Each element of this dimension corresponds to a specific BT module I BTR DN BTF_ints_to_dints MOV 2 RE Move Source BTR REG_LEN oe Dest BTF_ints_to_dints LEN oe File Arith Logical Control to dints Lenath De Position De Mode all Dest BT input BTR index BTR ints to dints PO5 0 Expression BTF_int_buffer_read BTF_ints_to_dints POS L 43021 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope BTR_ints_to_dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name_of_controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 project controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 19 Step to the Next BT Module 1 Enter the following rung After the MSG
287. oose the Save to File button Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 18 6 Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network Configure a PLC 5 or SLC 500 Message This procedure uses RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software revision 3 x A Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software as required open the project for the controller that sends the message B If a SLC 500 controller sends the message in the MSG instruction specify the following For this For a message to a Select Target Device SLC 500 controller 500CPU PLC 5 controller 5 Local Remote gt Remote C Display the set up screen for the message Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 PLC 5 controller Route PLC 59 or SLC 500 Messages From a DH Network 18 7 D Select a set up Foramessage from In this item Communication Command Specify PLC 5 Typed Read ot PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address This PLC 5 starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number port through which the message exits Data Table Address Target Device starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message Local DH Node Octal node number of the 1756 DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message Local Remote Remote Remote Link Type Data Highway
288. or the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again BTR EN MOV MOV Move Move Source BTR cfa BTR index LEN Source BTR cfa BTR index Channel 0 B Dest BTR REG_LEN Dest BTR Channel pe MOV MOV Move Move Source BTR cfa BTR index Rack Source BTR cfa BTR index Group 88000 0 Dest BTR Rack Dest BTR Group 8 O00 De MOV COP Move Copy File Source BTR_cfo BTR_index Slot Source BTR_cfg BTR_index Path 0 Dest BTR Path Dest BTR Slot Length 1 De MSG Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR IT 43014 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 20 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 2 Right click each undefined tag select New name and assign the following properties Name Description Data Type Scope block transfer message that reads data from MESSAGE name_of_controller each BT module controller BTR_cfg array of configuration properties for each BT BT_CONFIGURATION name_of_controller module number controller BTR_index controls which BT module that the MSG DINT name_of_controller instruction reads controller Where Is the number number of modules that this message reads 3 Configure the message MSG Type Block Transfer Read Message Control BTR On this tab For this item Type or select Configuration Message Type Block Transfer Read Number Of Elements 1 The dialog box requires an initial val
289. osely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 4 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network H Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish
290. ou will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes gt CO CO CO From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 25 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just config
291. ovember 2001 Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 5 Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx DTOS n a 65 5 1 4 d 0 7 41 5 0 6 d 0 6 d number of digits in Source x x x number of characters in Destination DTR DINT 2 9 2 4 EQU DINT 0 38 0 4 EQU REAL 0 38 0 4 FAL n a 10 3 x 40 977 x 3 8 of elements manipulated in one scan e time for the operators in the expression FBC 0 mismatches DINT 132 x 1 4 10 7 x 1 0 x number of bits to compare FBC 1 mismatches DINT 266 1 4 206 1 0 Based am Adds FBC 2 mismatches DINT 3890 1 4 297 1 0 FFL SINT 9 8 8 0 FFL INT 10 9 8 8 FFL DINT 10 2 8 3 FFL REAL 10 2 8 3 FFU SINT 11 1 x 0 6 8 9 x 0 5 x Length FFU INT 12 1 x 1 0 9 7 x 0 8 FFU DINT 125 x 0 6 99 x 0 4 FFU REAL 125 x 0 6 9 9 x 0 4 FIND n a 8 0 1 8 x 1 3 67 14 of characters in Search r s 1 1 r Result s Start FLL SINT 45 x 0 2 4 1 x 0 3 x Length FLL INT 4 7 x 0 2 43 x 0 3 FLL DINT 53 x 0 2 49 0 2 FLL REAL 5 3 0 2 4 9 x 0 2 FOR DINT 158 x 7 3 126 x 6 0 x Terminal value Step size FRD n a 9 0 6 9 FSC n a 10 8 x 3 9 e 10 15 x 3 7
292. oves counter ACC a DINT value to element 5 of the screen_a_DINT array A numeric display on the PanelView shows the value MOY Move Source counter ACC pe Dest screen_a_DINT 5 0e alarm_ack and alarm are aliases for the I O tags of the PanelView alarm_ack alarm pv al Data 3 4 pv a D Data 2 2 42857 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 6 10 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network Configure the PanelView 1 Start PanelBuilder32 software Terminal 2 Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application 3 From the Application menu select Settings 4 Click the Comms Setup button Communications Setup Ethernet m Terminal Ethernet Lab nterScan Delay 1100 ms Ethernet Config 5 42818 5 Click the Ethernet Config button Ethernet Configuration lo 7 nl 6 DFCPEnabe 72 IP Address 0 C ncel 8 Subne Mask 0 0 0 0 9 gt Gateway Address n n f fl 6 Clear uncheck the DHCP Enable check box 7 Type the IP address of the PanelView terminal 8 Type the subnet mask for the PanelView terminal if necessary 9 Type the gateway address for the PanelView terminal if necessary 10 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over EtherNet IP Network 6 11 11 U
293. potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 4 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Add the Remote 1794 ACN Module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 CNB x name_of_local_CNB lt _ _ _ A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1794 ACN that you are using and click OK C Name EY ED Description d Chassis Size mi E m Comm Format Rack Optimization Revision a fi H Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42433 C Type a name for the ACN module Use a name that identifies the I O of this adapter D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the number of I O modules on this rail F Are most of the modules on this rail digital I O modules If Then select Yes Hack Optimization No None G How closely must any module at this location match the information on this tab all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying H Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P Nov
294. project offline J E Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 2 Controller Fault Handler 239 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks MainTask 5 29 MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine 2 Unscheduled Programs CI Trends 6 Data Types Ca User Defined H O Predefined Ca Module Defined LI 1 0 Configuration 42316 m Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I O configuration of the controller If Then yes Go to Enter a Message no Right click 0 Configuration and select New Module C Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 17 D 85 Name punl Address Host Name Description m C IP Address Host Name lt Unspecified gt E Slot 2 Revision au fi Electronic Keying Compatible Module 4 42579 F D Type a name for the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed F How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab If Then select Notes all information must match Exact Match e type e catalog number e vendor e major and minor revision number all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module you can still replace a 1756 ENET B module with a 1756 ENBT module However
295. ptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel represents the value of the point or channel When one changes the other reflects the change UC The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices Start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis When the push button is on start is on motor is an alias tor the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis named conveyor When motor turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 2 Data 0 gt lt Local 2 Data 1 gt lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt JL TE LN za jc KS motor lt conveyor 0 0 Data 0 gt 5 dc 42435 A From the Zogic menu select Edit Tags Program Tags MainProgram Scope MainProgram Show Show All z Sot Tag Name i Tag Name Base Tag Type BODL BOOL BOOL B p 2 Alias For 42421 o Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 13 B Select the scope of the descriptive tag C To the right of the tag name click the Alias For cell The cell displays a W D Click the W E Click the Controller Scoped Tags button if it i
296. r Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 16 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Table 22 C Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controlle
297. r If you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element Table 17 B Message to a SLC 500 controller If the data is integer s first element of the tag for the data in the other controller And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element data table address in the SLC 500 controlle
298. r and click OK e condition p MSG e J E J E Type Unconfigured CEND e Message Control message DN ER gt Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 42424 Enter message EN where message is the message control tag from step B If your message reads or writes integers not REALs use a buffer of INTs in the message ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible n this procedure you use a PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write message which requires 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 19 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from an RSView project When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix condition Write integers to an RSView project controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured 0 L END Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith
299. r e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 Table 17 C Message to PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 17 Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag firs
300. r RSView Project C3 System Project Settings Channel gt Node 11 Scan Class Tag Database User Accounts mtb ie Edit Mode Channel amp Node 1 Scan Class Activity Log Setup Tag Database Tag Monitor User Accounts 4 43081 A Double click Tag Database B Click New Ta 9 Type Analog Security Description Minimum 0 Scale 1 Units Maximum 100 Offset 0 Data Type Defaut 4243 C Specify the properties of the tag Data Source Y Type Device Memory a p Address El 42432 D Click Device E Click 8 F Select the name of the node that you created in Create an Unsolicited Node and click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 24 Communicate with RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Validate an RSView32 Tag Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 G Type the address for the tag If the controller writes the value Then type the destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction reads the value H Click Accept source address that you specified in the MSG instruction This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects A On the Edit Mode tab double click Tag Monitor Tag Name Value State B Type the name of th
301. r example if inputs are mapped from word 0 to word 4 5 words enter a value of 6 5 input words 1 6 G Type or select the number of output words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1 H How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying I Click Next J Requested Packet Interval RPI ud ms K J Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42401 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16 3 J Is the module in a remote chassis If Then Yes Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update e Use a power of two times the Control Net NUT For example if the NUT is 5 ms type a rate of 5 10 20 ms etc No Leave the RPI at the default setting K Initially do you want the module to communicate with the controller If Then Notes Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box When you test this portion of the system clear the check box L If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential inju
302. r for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Element first element of the tag for the data in the other controller Table 11 B Message to a PLC 5 controller If the data is integer s And you want to read receive data For this item Message Type Type or select PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Tag first element of int_buffer write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of int_buffer Number Of Elements number of integers to transfer Destination Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g N7 10 floating point REAL read receive data Message Type PLC5 Typed Read Source Element data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this contr
303. r module The tag name of the adapter is in angle brackets tag name of the 1 0 device tag name of the adapter conveyor 2 1 0 lt conveyor Data 2 0 gt EE siue xp 2 Sr ue 42435 ns Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over EtherNet IP Network 4 13 Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gstablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fa
304. r scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type SLC Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element data table address in the SLC 500 controller e g F8 0 C Click the Communication tab D In the Path box type the following path 2 station address where station address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the message E Leave the communication method at the default settings of e CIP Cache Connections This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port F Click OK Step 8 Stagger the Messages Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 17 As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule 2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types e block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send
305. r the Axis Controller Tasks Motion Groups Name of New Group name of axs 44 Right click and select Axis Ungrouped Axes Properties Trends Complete the Hookup Tests 2 1 Dutput Limits Offset Fault Actions Tag General Units onversion Servo Homing Hookup Tune Dynamics Gains Test Increment 00 Revs Test Marker 4 3 Feedback Polarity Positive Negative Test Feedback Output Polarity Positive gt Negative Test Duput amp Feedback 43034 1 Click the Hookup tab 2 Type number of increments that the axis moves during each test 3 Select each test and follow the prompts 4 When you finish the hookup tests choose OK For more information about hookup diagnostics see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Program Motion Control 24 19 Develop Logic for Motion Control To write a motion application program you can insert motion instructions directly into your ladder logic program The motion instructions operate on one or more axes You must identify and configure axes before you can use them For more information about configuring axes see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual publication 1756 UM006 For more information on individual motion instructions see
306. r where the module is installed Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network 3 9 F Select a Comm Format If the module is also in the I O configuration of another controller then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format e g Listen Only Input Data If this module is a And And you want to Then select diagnostic digital input Full Diagnostics Input Data non diagnostic digital input local chassis time stamp a change in data CST Timestamped Input Data omit time stamps Input Data remote chassis p Rack Optimization diagnostic digital output p schedule when to apply outputs Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Full Diagnostics Output Data outputs fused digital output p schedule when to apply outputs CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data p not schedule when to apply CST Timestamped Fuse Data outputs Output Data non diagnostic and non fused local chassis schedule when to apply outputs Scheduled Output Data not schedule when to apply Output Data outputs remote chassis p Rack Optimization non isolated analog input floating point mode provides sufficient sample time time stamp when the data is sampled CST Timestamped Float Data wiring_mode omit the time stamp Float Data wiring_mode floating point mode does
307. rce A DINT O DINT 25 5 us for array subscript 8 5 us for DINT to REAL conversion of array element Source B REAL Destination REAL 44 8 us total MUL 18 0 us for MUL instruction Source A REAL Source B DINT 8 5 us for DINT to REAL conversion Destination DINT 12 4 us for REAL to DINT conversion Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 38 9 us total Table B 1 Sign Extension Conversion Times Estimate Execution Time B 3 To convert a To a Requires us 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mx DINT INT 74 6 1 DINT REAL 8 1 6 5 DINT SINT 7 3 6 0 INT DINT 1 2 1 1 INT REAL 1 9 1 9 REAL DINT 12 4 9 8 REAL INT 15 0 1 8 REAL SINT 14 9 1 7 SINT DINT 1 0 1 0 SINT REAL 17 1 7 Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx ABL n a 13 7 11 4 ABS DINT 0 61 0 61 ABS REAL 0 88 0 87 ACB n a 13 2 10 9 ACL n a 126 5 98 7 ACS REAL 272 5 250 5 ADD DINT 0 57 0 55 ADD REAL 10 8 10 4 AFI n a 0 1 0 1 AHL n a 92 2 71 8 AND DINT 0 57 0 55 ARD n a 76 8 60 1 ARL n a 77 0 60 2 ASN REAL 263 1 241 8 ATN REAL 224 7 213 2 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 B 4 Estimate Execution Time Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued
308. re ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If you want the controller to fault major fault If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail Then Notes Select the check box continue operating Choose Next Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 6 Program Motion Control Associated Axes Channel 0 11 1756 MOZAE H New Axis Channel 1 lt z 4 43031 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 11 12 13 14 10 Choose New Axis Type a name for the axis and choose OK Assign the axis to a channel the physical connection on the servo module to which the axis is wired Repeat steps 10 12 for the other channel if required Choose Finish 1756 085 Data Rate E z Mb 15 Cycle Time pu 7 ms 16 Transmit Power High 15 16 17 43017 How many axes are connected to this module In the next section you associate the axes with the module If this number of axes Then select a
309. ress greatest node number that you will use on the network Media Redundancy channels in use Network Name name for the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration then click Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Yes RUNS CO CO ON From the File menu select Open Select the file for the network and choose Open From the Network menu select Online Select the Edits Enabled check box From the Network menu select Properties From the Network Parameters tab update the following parameters In this box Specify Max Scheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network Click OK From the Network menu select Single Pass Browse From the File menu select Save Select the Optimize and re write Schedule for all Connections button default and click OK In RSLogix 5000 software save the online project Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 14 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Validate Connections Is this task you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that
310. roject ControlLogix Chassis with 1756 CNB Module LTHBIHYTBAMSN 42520 ControlNet Network How to Use This Procedure To communicate with an RSView project you have two options If the data Then use a needs regular delivery at a rate that you polled message specify is sent when a specific condition occurs unsolicited message your application Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 14 2 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network Configure a ControlNet A Start RSLinx software Driver B From the Communications menu select Configure Drivers C From the Available Driver Types list select the type of ControlNet communication card D Click Add New E Assign a name to the driver if desired F Supply the required information about the communication card EXAMPLE Configure 1784 KTC X Station Name ABKTC Unused interrupt number Interrupt None Memory address from the Mem Address pooo DIP switch on the 1784 KTC X card G Click OK H Click Close Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Net Address lt 120 Base 42465 ControlNet node number for the workstation 1 0 base memory address from the DIP switches on the 1784 KTC X card Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet Network 14 3 Select a Communication Select a method for transferr
311. ry or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 16 4 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device Step 2 Create Aliases In this step you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I O points devices As an alias for an I O point each tag provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point represents the value of the point When one changes the other reflects the change The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names such as start and motor Later the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I O devices startis an alias for the push button at bit 1 of word 0 of the module motor is an alias for the starter contactor at bit 0 of word 0 of the 1756 DNB in slot 5 of the local chassis When the push button is module 1756 DNB in slot 5 of the local chassis When motor on startis on turns on the starter contactor turns on stop start motor lt Local 5 Data 0 0 gt Local 5 l Data 0 1 Local 5 0 Data 0 0 JE IUE ES J E J E C 2 motor lt Local 5 0 Data 0 0 gt 4243 A From the Zogic menu select Edit Ta
312. s available CAII the data for I O modules is at the controller scope F Select the I O device that the tag represents If the device is Then digital 1 Nextto name s1ot X click the sign 2 Click the Data member 3 To the right of the Data member click M 4 Click the point number of the device analog 1 Nextto name s1ot X click the sign 2 Scroll down and double click Ch z Data Where Is name name of the chassis If Then the name is local Local remote name of the communication module in the chassis such as a 1756 ENBx or 1756 CNB module slot slot number of the module X type of device If Then input I output 0 Chz channel that the device is wired to G Press the Enter key or click another cell Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 3 14 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over an EtherNet IP Network When you finish the Tags window should look similar to the following Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 l Data 1 C A start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis named conveyor conveyor 1 1 Data 1 C Even if the I O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format address the required point as described in step F Tag Name Alias For Base Tag start conveyor 1 l Data 1 C A startis an alias for point 1 of the input modu
313. s controller Q Is it critical to keep the poll list scan time to a minimum If Then select No Standard multiple message transfer per node scan Yes Standard single message transfer per node scan Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 6 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Determine when the master controller should send its messages To send messages to slave stations Select before polling the next station Between station polls when the station number of the master appears in In polling sequence the polling lists Select the 12st normal poll tag step B After polling the priority stations how many normal stations do you want to poll If Then all Leave the default of 0 not all Type the number to poll before returning to the priority stations Select the 1st priority poll tag step B Select the 12st active stations tag step B Click OK pe Controller name of controller Controller Tags 48 J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler 1 9 Tasks H E MainT ask E cS MainProgram 9 Program Tags E MainRoutine 3 Unscheduled Programs TuS Double click Controller Tags Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 7 Inthe list_priority_poll tag step B enter the addresses of the priority stations to poll If this controller master sen
314. s of the operands i Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Object Attribute Instruction True Time 15 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX AXIS AccelerationCommand GSV 39 8 28 7 AXIS AccelerationDataScaling GSV 36 3 25 9 AXIS AccelerationDataScalingExp GSV 36 9 26 0 AXIS AccelerationDataScalingFact GSV 36 4 26 2 AXIS AccelerationFeedback GSV 39 8 28 6 AXIS AccelerationFeedforwardGain GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS AccelerationFeedforwardGain SSV 130 4 107 5 AXIS AccelerationLimitBipolar GSV 36 0 25 9 AXIS AccelerationLimitBipolar SSV 128 7 106 AXIS AccelerationLimitNegative GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS AccelerationLimitNegative SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS AccelerationLimitPositive GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS AccelerationLimitPositive SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS ActualAcceleration GSV 60 0 40 9 AXIS ActualPosition GSV 59 8 40 7 AXIS ActualVelocity GSV 59 7 40 7 AXIS ATConfigurationList GSV 88 1 59 4 AXIS AttributeErrorCode GSV 36 8 26 6 AXIS AttributeErrorlD GSV 37 3 26 8 AXIS AuxFeedbackConfiguration GSV 36 2 25 8 AXIS AuxFeedbackRatio GSV 36 6 26 4 AXIS AuxFeedbackResolution GSV 36 6 26 4 AXIS AuxFeedbackType GSV 34 8 25 1 AXIS AuxPositionFeedback GSV 39 8 28 7 AXIS AverageVelocity GSV 121 1 82 6 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 11
315. s successful look at the front of the module For this module Check this indicator For this indication 1756 ENET OK LED solid green 1756 ENBx four character display IP address of the module 1756 AENx NETWORK STATUS flashing green or steady green Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 16 Configure an EtherNet IP Module Configure a Module Using To configure a module using BOOTP software BOOTP Install BOOTPServer Software Connect the Hardware Enter the Default Network Settings Configure the Module Disable BOOTP e Save the Relation List Install BOOTPServer Software This procedure requires BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation You can find the software at either of these locations RSLogix 5000 software CD ENU N TOOLS BootP Utility folder BootPServer exe www ab com networks Connect the Hardware 1 Install the module 2 Connect the module to the network 3 Turn on the power to the module 4 Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Configure EtherNet IP Module 1 17 Enter the Default Network Settings 1 Start the BOOTPServer software BOOTP Server File Tools Help BOOTP Request History hr min sec Ethernet Address IP Address Subnet Mask The module sends its Ethernet 1651 28 00 00 BC 03 62 37 address to the BOOTP server on a 16 51 26 00 00 BC 03 62 37 r
316. s them in int_buffer_read Only include the msg_write EN tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module msg_read EN msg write EN MSG j E J H Type Block Transfer Read CEND Message Control msg read M lt DN gt 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope msg_read block transfer read message MESSAGE name_of_controller controller msg_write block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE name_of_controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 controller Communicate w 2 Enter the following rung ith 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network 9 9 When msg_read is done the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the controller msg_read DN ints_to_dints FAL jE CRES gt File Arith Logical Control ints_to_dints Length CDN gt Position 0 Mode ALL CER gt Dest dints_input ints_to_dints POS Expression int buffer read ints to dints POS 42463 Tag Name Description Data Type Scope int buffer read array that stores the data from the BT module INT length name of controller controller ints to dints converts the 16 bit integers from the BT module CONTROL name of controller to 32 bit integers for the Logix5000 controller controller FAL Length number of e
317. sage Based Polling standard Go to Step 5 Configure a Slave Controller message based Complete this step A Open the RSLogix 5000 project 5 29 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags J Controller Fault Handler LI Power Up Handler Tasks tal MainT ask MainProgram A Program Tags E MainRoutine C3 Unscheduled Programs 3 o 5 3 B Right click Controller name of controller and select Properties C Click the Serial Port tab c Controller Properties Ascii examples mi x Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced File General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol D Mode Lise Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits jb zl Parity None Stop Bits ho H F Control Line Handshake f G Continuous Carrier H BTS Send Delay D 20 RTS Off Delay fo x20 ms 42251 D Select System default E Select the settings for your DF1 network F Select Half Duplex G Clear uncheck the Continuous Carrier check box default Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 L 0 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22 9 H Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the RTS signal turns on high and the time that data is sent For example a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay I Type the amount of delay 20 ms units between the time that the last character is sent and th
318. sen ree Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over EtherNet IP Network 5 13 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Does Another Controller Multiple controllers can consume a produced tag Require the Data If Then another controller requires the same data Add the Local 1756 ENBx or ENET Module on page 5 4 no other controller requires the data You are done Skip the rest of this procedure Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 14 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Add the Local 1756 ENBx or A Open the RSLogix 50
319. sing ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 8 6 Communicate with 1756 1 0 over a ControlNet Network Add 1 0 Modules In this task you add I O modules to the I O configuration of the controller A Is the module in the I O configuration of another controller If And it is an And you want to Then no Go to the next step yes output module Go to the next step input module maintain communication with the 1 Copy the module from the 1 0 configuration of module if it loses communication the other controller with the other controller 2 Paste the module into the 1 0 configuration of this controller 3 Go to Create Aliases stop communication with the Go to the next step module if it loses communication with the other controller 1 0 Configuration g local 1 0 module here x 1756 CNB x name of local CNB z x 1756 CNB x name of remote CNB lt q remote 1 0 module here B Where is the module located If it is in Then same chassis as controller right click 0 Configuration and select New Module remote chassis right click the remote 1756 CNB module and select New Module C Select the type of module and click OK D _y Name Slot E 4 Description zl Comm Format 0 0 8 1 Revision 69 Electronic Keying Compatible Module UN D Typ
320. t click the 1756 DHRIO module and choose Edit Module 1756 DHRIO module 2 For each channel type the link ID of the corresponding network 3 Choose OK F Add the remaining communication 1 Right click the backplane and choose Add Module module s that are in the backplane 2 Select the type of device and choose OK chassis 3 Type or select the slot number of the module 4 Type the link ID s of the network s to which the module is connected 5 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network 17 7 routing table depicts the required networks Step Detailed actions G To the network s created in the 1 Right click the link ID and choose Add Module previous step add the 2 Select the type of device and choose OK corresponding communication 3 Type the node or IP address of the module modules in other ControlLogix 4 the link Dist chassis Type the link ID s For this module Type the link ID s 1756 ENET of the backplane of the module i e the 1756 CNB ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides DH Bridge in the routine table of the added module 5 Choose OK Repeat steps F and G until the Download and save the configuration 1 To download the configuration to the module choose Apply 2 To save a copy of the configuration as a file choose the Save to File button Publication 1756 UM001D EN
321. t element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send data Message Type PLC5 Typed Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of values to transfer Destination Element Click Browse data table address in the PLC 5 controller e g F8 0 Click the Communication tab Select the 1756 DHRIO module and click OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 17 18 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH Network F Specify the remaining communication properties For a message to a Type or select ControlLogix controller 1 Type a 1 5 2 Type the port number from which the message exits y For this port Specify ep name_of_DHRIO backplane port of a 1756 controller or module 1 name of DHRIO 42466 ControlNet port of a 1756 CNB module 2 EtherNet IP port of a 1756 ENBx or ENET module channel A of a 1756 DHRIO module channel B of a 1756 DHRIO module 3 3 Type a comma 4 Type the address of the next hardware device e g controller module For a device on a Specify ControlLogix backplane slot number ControlNet network node number EtherNet IP network IP address or DNS name DH network 8 followed by the node number e g 8 37 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until you have specified the destinati
322. tab 2 Select the type of axis positioning that you want to use 3 Type the counts per unit Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 14 Program Motion Control 1756 M02AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive Output Limits Offset General Units Conversion Serva Homing F 2 _ External Drive Configuration rtr Loop Configuration Position Servo v Enable Drive Fault Input Drive Fault Input Normally Open Closed Real Time Axis Infomation 3 Attribute 1 lt none gt Y Attribute 2 lt none gt Y 43032 1 Click the Servo tab 2 Select the configuration of the servo drive 3 Optional Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name 4 Choose OK Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Program Motion Control 24 15 1756 MO8SE Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier Dynamics Gains Output Limits Offset General Units Conversion Drive Motor Feedback 2 Amplifier Catalog Number lt none gt Loop Configuration Position Servo Drive Resolution Counts Motor Rev Real Time Axis Infomation Attribute 1 ne s i Attribute 2 ne 43029 1 Click the Drive tab 2 Select the catalog number of the amplifier 3 Optional Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name
323. tch the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all exceptthe minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 4 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network H Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode 42398 H Initially do you want to the module to communicate with the controller If Then Yes Leave the check box cleared unchecked No Select the check box EXAMPLE Inhibit a module Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system Initially inhibit the module When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module clear the check box I If communication with the module fails how do you want the controller to respond ATTENTION If communication with a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic J Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 20
324. terOffset GSV 40 6 29 3 AXIS TelegramType GSV 36 0 25 7 AXIS TestDirectionForward GSV 29 0 20 4 AXIS Testlncrement GSV 38 5 21 6 AXIS Testlncrement SSV 130 4 107 4 AXIS TestStatus GSV 37 6 27 0 AXIS TorqueCommand GSV 37 2 26 8 AXIS TorqueDataScaling GSV 33 9 24 6 AXIS TorqueDataScalingExp GSV 36 2 25 8 AXIS TorqueDataScalingFactor GSV 36 7 26 4 AXIS TorqueFeedback GSV 37 2 26 9 AXIS TorqueLimitBipolar GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS TorqueLimitBipolar SSV 28 7 106 AXIS TorqueLimitNegative GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS TorqueLimitNegative SSV 28 8 106 AXIS TorqueLimitPositive GSV 36 0 26 0 AXIS TorqueLimitPositive SSV 28 7 106 AXIS TorqueLimitSource GSV 37 2 26 8 AXIS TorqueOffset GSV 38 0 27 3 AXIS TorqueOffset SSV 129 9 107 0 AXIS TorquePolarity GSV 36 2 25 7 AXIS TorqueScaling GSV 38 5 27 7 AXIS TorqueScaling SSV 130 4 107 6 AXIS TorqueThreshold GSV 36 0 25 9 AXIS TorqueThreshold SSV 128 7 106 1 AXIS TuneAcceleration GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS TuneAccelerationTime GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS TuneDeceleration GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS TuneDecelerationTime GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS Tunelnertia GSV 39 1 28 1 AXIS TuneRiseTime GSV 38 4 27 8 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Estimate Execution Time B 17 Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 17
325. th 32 bit integers DINTs Use the DINT data type for integers whenever possible n this procedure you use a PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write message which requires 16 bit integers Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required Communicate with RSView Project over an EtherNet IP Network 7 19 The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs Read integers from an RSView project When condition turns on reads 16 bit integer values INTs and stores them in int_buffer Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array This converts the values to 32 bit integers DINTs for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix condition Write integers to an RSView project controller condition MSG 4 J E Type Unconfigured Message Control message DN message DN fal_control FAL JE CRES gt File Arith Logical fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest dint array fal control pos Expression int buffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the RSView project fal control KH Zu fal control DN CRES gt message EN FAL File Arith Logical Control Len
326. th a module fails the controller operates on old data from the module To avoid potential injury or damage either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail If you want the Then Notes controller to fault major fault Select the check box continue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic 12 Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 9 Add a Block Transfer Do any modules require block transfers Module If Then Yes Complete the steps in this section Add a Block Transfer Module No Go to Address 1 0 on page 20 26 Though not required when the module is in the I O configuration you gain these advantages It is easier to complete the communication path to the module The I O configuration provides documentation about the module 1 0 Configuration x 1756 DHRIO x name of DHRIO Ch lt rack group size RIO ADAPTER name of adapter 44 1 Right click name of adapter and select New Module 2 Select RIO MODULE and click OK 3 gt Name Description Ei Parent Rack adapter name 1 4 1 4 Rack 21 0 Groups 4 Group 5 Slot 42442 3 Type a name for the module 4 Type or select the group number of the module 5 Type or s
327. that requires block transfers D 2 Data from a Buffer of INTs DINTs for use in BT module the project Word 1 int buffer read 0 dints input 0 Word 2 int buffer read 1 dints input 1 Word 3 int buffer read 2 dints input 2 1 The MSG instruction reads 16 bit integers INTs from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs 2 An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32 bit integers DINTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs 2 DINTsfromthe BufferoflNIs Data fora BT project module dints_output 0 int buffer write 0 Word 1 dints_output 1 int buffer write 1 Word 2 dints_output 2 int buffer write 2 Word 3 1 An FAL instruction converts the 32 bit integers DINTs from the Logix5000 controller to 16 bit integers INTs Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs 2 The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to BT module Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 8 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over a ControlNet Network Read Data From a Block Transfer Module 1 Enter the following rung Reads 16 bit integers INTs from the module and store
328. the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756 RM007 Each motion instruction has an operand named Motion control This field uses MOTION INSTRUCTION tag to store status information during the execution of motion instructions This status information can include instruction status errors etc MSO Motion Servo On EN The Axis Motion control gt Motion control R5 operand ATTENTION Tags used for the motion control operand of motion instruction should only be used once Re use of the same motion control operand in other instructions can cause unintended operation of the control variables For more information about the MOTION INSTRUCTION tag refer to the appropriate motion instruction in the Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1756 RM007 You can read motion status and configuration parameters in your logic using two methods Method Example Directly accessing the MOTION GROUP Axis faults and AXIS structures e Motion status Using the GSV instruction Actual position Enable the Auto Tag Update attribute fora CommandAcceleration motion group Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 24 20 Program Motion Control Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 In your ladder logic program you can modify motion configuration parameters using the SSV instruction For example you can chang
329. the devices that you have just configured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are 2 Gstahlished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree A 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 20 7500 ms Wi ves id iz Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 1680204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed out 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 29 Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Displa
330. the Axis e Select an Axis Configuration Assign Units for Measurements e Assign a Conversion Constant 1756 MO2AE Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive e 1756 MOS8SE Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier e 1756 MOS8SE Select the Motor and Feedback Display the Properties for the Axis Controller Tasks Motion Groups Name of New Group name of axis 44 Right click and select Axis Ungrouped Axes Properties Trends Select an Axis Configuration Output Limits Offset Fau General Units Conversion Serva Homing Hookup Select the type of axis that you want __ Axis Configuration Servo 43033 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Program Motion Control 24 13 Assign Units for Measurements 1 Dynamics Gains Output Limits General Units Conversion Drive M 2 WM Position Units Average Velocity Timebase 0 25 s 43027 1 Click the Units tab 2 Type the units in which you want to program such as revs degrees inches or millimeters Assign a Conversion Constant 1 Dynamics Gains Output Limits Offset Faull General Units Conversion Drive Motor Feedback Homing 2 Positioning Mode Linear s 2000000 Drive Counts 1 0 p Conversion Constant 2000 0 based on 200000 Counts Motor Rev 43028 1 Click the Conversion
331. the set up screen for the message D Specify the following parameters If the controller For this section And this item Specify is a PLC 5 This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the PLC 5 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count MultiHop Select Yes SLC 500 This Controller Communication Command PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller Size in Elements number of elements to read or write Channel 1 Target Device Data Table Address Type in quotation marks the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller e g count MultiHop Select Yes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 24 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network E Click the MultiHop tab To Address Type To Address This PLCS 1756 ENet I P str C ControlLogix Backplane E 1756 Backplane Slot dec am amp 42425 F Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller G Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 6 Communicate with a PanelV
332. tinue operating Leave the check box Monitor the connection cleared unchecked using ladder logic M Click Finish Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 8 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 3 Add the 1788 CNC Determine if you must complete this step Module If you are sending a message to a Then FlexLogix controller Complete this step ControlLogix controller Go to Step 4 Add the Other Controller PLC 5C controller E 10 Configuration 5 1756 CNB B name_of_local_cnb 42399 A Right click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module B Select the type of 1788 CNC module communication card that is in the FlexLogix controller and click OK C Name Node zl Slot 1 4 G Description 1 Revision fi fi E Electronic Keying Compatible Module 42427 a name for the module D Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module E Type or select the slot number where the module is installed 1 or 2 F How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab If this information must match Then select all including minor revision number Exact Match all except the minor revision number Compatible Module none Disable Keying G Click Next Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network 11 9 K Inhibi Module L
333. tion 24 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT 0 MOV instruction 24 bytes Source DINT 0 1 2 Destination DINT 3 4 5 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 C 10 Estimate Memory Use 2 When an array uses a tag type DINT as an index additional memory is used depending on the number of dimensions in the array Tag Additional Memory DINT DINT 84 bytes DINT DINT 0 152 bytes DINT O DINT 0 152 bytes For example Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 108 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT DINT MOV instruction 176 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT DINT 0 0 3 The controller uses a 32 bit index for all arrays If you use a tag other than DINT to reference a position in an array you add the data conversion memory use see page C 1 as well as the memory use for using a tag as an index Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 168 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT INT MOV instruction 236 bytes Source DINT Destination DINT INT 0 0 4 Changing the source and destination data type in the above examples increases the instruction s memory use Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 200 bytes Source DINT Destination INT INT Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Memory Use C 11 Example Tag Memory MOV instruction 240 bytes Source SINT Destination INT INT MOV instruction 268 bytes Source DINT Destination SINT INT 0 0 MOV instruction 320 bytes Source INT Dest
334. twork 20 1 Program Motion Control 24 1 Estimate Battery Life 25 1 Estimate Execution Time B 1 Estimate Memory Use C 1 Reconfigure an 1 0 module E 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Summary of Changes 2 Notes Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Purpose of this Manual Who Should Use this Manual Preface This manual guides the development of projects for ControlLogix controllers It provides step by step procedures on how to establish communications over the following networks EtherNet IP ControlNet remote I O DH 485 serial e with the following devices controllers I O workstations TM PanelView terminals This manual works together with the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 which covers the following tasks Manage project files Organize your logic Organize tags Program routines e Test a project Handle faults This manual is intended for those individuals who program applications that use ControlLogix controllers such as software engineers control engineers application engineers e instrumentation technicians Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 2 When to Use this Manual this manual when you are ready to integrate your application with the 1 0 devices controllers and networks in your system after you perform these actions
335. ue Destination Tag BTR_int_buffer_read To create this tag A Click New Tag B Type the name C In the Data type box type INT length where length equals the Zength variable of the B7_input tag from page 20 18 D Choose OK Communication Path Path to the 1756 DHRIO module A Click Browse B Select the RIO MODULE with which you want to communicate C Choose OK This complete the Module Address properties Although your logic will change the path and module address the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial set of properties RIO or ControlNet RIO Cache Connection check box Clear the Cache Connection check box Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network 20 21 Enter the Message Properties for Each Module 3 63 Controller name_of_controller Controller Tags 48 J Controller Fault Handler 2 Power Up Handler Ex Tasks 5 68 MainT ask 5 88 MainProgram 2j Program T ags E MainRoutine m 42376 1 Double click Controller Tags 2 Enter the message properties for each BT module Tag Name Value BTR_cfg NS Properties for the first t t BTR cfg 0 BT module BTR cfg 0 REQ LEN number of elements to transfer BTR_cfg 0 Channel channel A or B of the 1756 DHRIO module that is connected to the RIO network
336. ue Time Us Notes 1756 11 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx SIN REAL 229 2 214 4 SIZE DINT 5 6 49 Sal DINT 3 7 3 1 501 DINT 6 1 5 0 500 DINT 6 2 49 SOR DINT 9 9 7 6 SOR REAL 37 5 27 9 SRT DINT 30 4 25 7 Varies with the length and randomness of SRT REAL 35 2 29 3 SSV n a See Table B 3 on page B 10 STD SINT 106 9 x 51 9 8 1 x 47 9 x Length STD INT 113 4 x 52 5 93 3 x 48 3 STD DINT 113 3 x 51 4 93 4 x 47 5 STD REAL 115 1 x 55 8 958 x 52 5 STOD example 1 n a 79 0 56 3 Source ABCDEFGH1234ABCDEFGH STOD example 2 n a 53 6 36 6 Source 1234 STOR example 1 n a 594 8 353 1 Source ABCDEFGH1 234ABCDEFGH STOR example 2 n a 569 5 333 7 Source 1 234 SUB DINT 0 57 0 55 SUB REAL 10 7 10 3 SWPB High Low DINT 6 7 5 3 SWPB Reverse DINT 5 5 4 7 SWPB Word DINT 5 9 4 9 TAN REAL 289 8 272 3 TND n a 0 002 0 01 TOD n a 15 0 114 TOF TIMER 0 32 0 31 TON TIMER 0 43 0 42 TRN DINT 13 1 10 2 TRN REAL 21 2 16 7 UID n a 37 9 27 9 n a 37 3 27 5 UPPER n a 7 8 x 1 4 6 4 x 1 1 x of characters in Source A number of characters in Source B XIC BOOL 0 1 0 1 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 10 Estimate Execution Time Table B 2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions Continued Instruction Data type True Time Us Notes 1756 L1 L1Mx 1756 L55Mxx 0 BOOL 0 1 0 1 yg XOR DINT 0 57 0 54 XY REAL 500 4 450 0 Actual time depends on the value
337. uffer fal control pos When condition turns on moves the values in dint array to int buffer This converts the values to 16 bit integers INTs Then the message instruction sends int buffer to the other controller Where dint array condition fal control FAL 4 CRES 4 File Arith Logical Control fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN MSG iE 4 Type Unconfigured __ Message Control message gt Is an 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 11 14 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet Network Step 6 Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click B Select a configuration for the message Table 11 A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller If you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controlle
338. uffer to the other controller Where dint array condition fal control FAL 4 CRES 4 File Arith Logical Control fal_control Length Position 0 Mode all Dest int_buffer fal_control pos Expression dint array fal control pos fal control DN MSG iE 4 Type Unconfigured __ Message Control message gt Is an 42424 array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller int_buffer array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 5 18 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network Configure the Message A In the MSG instruction click B Select a configuration for the message Table 5 A Message to a ControlLogix controller If you want to read receive the data For this item Message Type Type or select CIP Data Table Read Source Element first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller Number Of Elements number of elements to transfer Destination Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller for the data write send the data Message Type CIP Data Table Write Source Tag first element of the tag controller scoped in this controller that contains the data Number Of Elements number of e
339. ult Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 4 14 Communicate with 1794 1 0 Over an EtherNet IP Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 905 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Chapter 5 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet IP Network When to Use This Use this procedure to transfer data from one controller to another Procedure controller over an EtherNet IP network ControlLogix controller to another ControlLogix controller e ControlLogix controller to a PLC SE or SLC 5 05 controller PLC 5E or SLC 5 05 controller to a ControlLogix controller ControlLogix Controller ControlLogix Controller PLC 5E Controller i SLC 5 05 Controller LE 42607 Before You Begin Before you use this procedure do the following 1 To produce and consu
340. ults are considered type 2 faults with error codes from 1 to 32 See Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures publication 1756 PM001 Program Motion Control The following figure shows several rungs of a motion control application program Rung 0 Enables the Feed and Cut axes when you press the servo_on button Rung 1 Jogs the Feed axis in the positive direction when you press the jog_plus button Rung 2 Jogs the Feed axis in the reverse direction when you press the jog_minus button Rung 3 Stops the Feed axis when you release with the jog_plus button or the jog_minus button End MSQ LON Mso H DN jog minus jog_plus nm servo on MS0 34 M80 4 Motion Servo On I EN Motion Servo On LEN Anis Feed z DN5 Anis Cut e CDN5 Motion control MSD 1 CER 2 Motion control MSO_2 ER gt 24 21 m i Motion Axis Jog CEN Axis Feed z Motion control MAJ_1 I CDN Direction 0 I CER Speed 30 Speed units of Maximum More gt gt A Motion Axis Jog Anis Feed Jt Motion control MAJ 2 Direction 1 Speed 30 Speed units of Maximum Accel rate accel_rate 2 Accel units of Maximum Decel rate decel_rate 2 Decel units of Maximum Profile 5 Merge Enabled Merge speed Current MAS Motion Axis Stop CEN Axis Feed t CDN5 Motion control MAS 1 CER Stop Type Jog
341. ured Step Detailed actions A Determine if communications are Gstablished Isa A over the 1 0 Configuration folder If Then No The controller can communicate with the module Yes Communications are not established Go to the next step B Identify a fault Start at the local communication module and work A down through the tree 0 Configuration 1 E A x 1756 YYY x local com module 2 A z 17xx YYY adapter_1 3 A 0 17xx YYY module 1 A 1 17xx YYY module 2 C Identify the fault code 1 Right click the module and select Properties 2 Click the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI m ms 2 0 750 0 ms inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 16 0204 Connection Request Error Connection request timed aut 42437 3 Identify the code for the fault Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 9 26 Communicate with 1771 1 0 Over ControlNet Network Step Detailed actions D Clear the fault 1 From the Help menu select Contents 2 Click the ndex tab 3 Type module faults Contents Index Find 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for module faults 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Module Faults 16 0
342. x module module 6555555555555555 0000000000000000 55555555550 55555555586 0500000000000000 0050000000000000 IP ADDRESS 00000000000000000 O 9 EX TET Switch 42872 TEST TEST You can configure a module either before you install the module Configure the module in a temporary location such as a chassis that is on a test bench After you configure the module install it in your system e after you install the module in your system Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 1 2 Configure EtherNet IP Module Before You Begin The configuration of an EtherNet IP module includes e IP address required e subnet mask recommended gateway address optional domain name optional DNS server addresses Coptional You use software to configure an EtherNet IP module The modules do not have hardware switches to assign an address To configure a module use one of these software RSLogix 5000 Software e RSLinx Software e BOOTP Server Software To determine which software lets you configure your module use the following table To configure this module Use one of these software RSLogix 5000 RSLinx BOOTP server 1756 ENBx v v v 1756 ENET v v v 1794 AENx v Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 ControlLogix chassis Configure an EtherNet IP Mo
343. y Module Faults 16 0001 16 00ff 1880100 16401 ff 16 0200 16 02FF 1580300 16H03FF 1880fd03 16 fd05 16 fe02 168fe c 188ff00 16 ff e Module Faults 42439 4 Select the range for the code and click Display 5 Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations E Go to step A Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 20 30 Communicate Over a Remote 1 0 Network Stagger the Messages Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 As you add messages to your project you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed follow these rules Rule 1 Enable no more than 16 messages at one time including block transfers Rule2 X Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time e CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached e CIP generic e PLC2 PLC3 PLC5 or SLC all types block transfer reads or writes that are not cached If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2 then stagger the execution of your messages Here are some options Send each message in sequence Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2 Program a message to communicate with multiple devices Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules on page 20 15 Chapter 2 1 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable When to Use this Proce
344. y SSV 20 5 90 2 SERIALPORT PendingRTSSendDelay SSV 20 8 90 5 SERIALPORT PendingStopBits SSV 103 6 90 0 SERIALPORT RTSOffDelay GSV 23 2 18 9 SERIALPORT RTSSendDelay GSV 23 2 18 9 SERIALPORT StopBits GSV 15 0 11 9 TASK Instance GSV 19 0 15 4 TASK LastScanTime GSV 26 0 21 4 TASK LastScanTime SSV 15 9 21 7 TASK Maxlnterval GSV 32 0 26 4 TASK Maxlnterval SSV 22 3 27 1 TASK MaxScanTime GSV 26 0 21 4 TASK MaxScanTime SSV 15 9 21 7 TASK MinInterval GSV 32 0 26 4 TASK MinInterval SSV 22 3 27 1 TASK Priority GSV 24 3 19 9 TASK Rate GSV 26 1 21 4 TASK StartTime GSV 31 9 26 4 TASK StartTime SSV 22 3 27 1 TASK Watchdog GSV 26 0 21 4 TASK Watchdog SSV 30 7 32 2 WALLCLOCKTIME CSTOffset GSV 31 1 24 7 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 22 Estimate Execution Time Table B 3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions Continued Object Attribute Instruction True Time us 1756 L1 L1MX 1756 L55MXX WALLCLOCKTIME CSTOffset SSV 1764 2 1257 4 WALLCLOCKTIME CurrentValue GSV 42 9 33 3 WALLCLOCKTIME CurrentValue SSV 67 4 59 2 WALLCLOCKTIME DateTime GSV 72 2 57 0 WALLCLOCKTIME DateTime SSV 117 6 100 7 Table B 4 Array Index Times For a tag in the subscriptofa Add us two dimension array 22 three dimension array 27 Publication 1756 UM001D EN P November 2001 Estimate Execution Time B 23 Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine 1 42609

1756-UM001D-EN-P, ControlLogix System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents